Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Convex Optimization

556 missions · 341 completed

Missions

Open215Completed341All556
🏆Completed
Dynamical SystemsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights II: The ODE Solution Satisfies f(X(t)) − f⋆ ≤ 2‖x₀ − x⋆‖²/t²Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method (Nesterov, 1983) minimizes a smooth convex function fff with the update

xk=yk−1−s∇f(yk−1),yk=xk+k−1k+2(xk−xk−1),x_k=y_{k-1}-s\nabla f(y_{k-1}),\qquad y_k=x_k+\frac{k-1}{k+2}(x_k-x_{k-1}),xk​=yk−1​−s∇f(yk−1​),yk​=xk​+k+2k−1​(xk​−xk−1​),

and, for step size s≤1/Ls\le 1/Ls≤1/L, attains f(xk)−f⋆≤2∥x0−x⋆∥2/(s(k+1)2)f(x_k)-f^\star\le 2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2/(s(k+1)^2)f(xk​)−f⋆≤2∥x0​−x⋆∥2/(s(k+1)2). The rate O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) is optimal among first-order methods, yet the classical proof proceeds by an "estimate sequence" argument that offers little insight into why the momentum coefficient (k−1)/(k+2)(k-1)/(k+2)(k−1)/(k+2) works.

Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17, 2016) showed that, as s→0s\to0s→0, the iterates track the solution of the second-order ordinary differential equation

X¨+3tX˙+∇f(X)=0,X(0)=x0, X˙(0)=0,\ddot X+\frac3t\dot X+\nabla f(X)=0,\qquad X(0)=x_0,\ \dot X(0)=0,X¨+t3​X˙+∇f(X)=0,X(0)=x0​, X˙(0)=0,

under the time identification t≈kst\approx k\sqrt st≈ks​. Their Theorem 3 is the continuous-time counterpart of Nesterov's rate. Its short proof by an energy (Lyapunov) function became the template for a large literature on continuous-time models of accelerated methods, including Wibisono, Wilson and Jordan's variational perspective (PNAS 2016) and Attouch, Chbani, Peypouquet and Redont's analysis of the damped system x¨+αtx˙+∇Φ(x)=0\ddot x+\frac\alpha t\dot x+\nabla\Phi(x)=0x¨+tα​x˙+∇Φ(x)=0 (Math. Program. 2018).

This mission formalizes Theorem 3 and the three steps of its proof.

Setting

Let n≥0n\ge0n≥0 and let Rn\mathbb R^nRn carry the Euclidean inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. For f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R differentiable, ∇f\nabla f∇f is its gradient.

  • For L>0L>0L>0, the class FL\mathcal F_LFL​ consists of the convex, continuously differentiable fff with ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x)-\nabla f(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥ for all x,yx,yx,y. The class F∞\mathcal F_\inftyF∞​ is ⋃L>0FL\bigcup_{L>0}\mathcal F_L⋃L>0​FL​.
  • A minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆ is any point with f(x⋆)≤f(y)f(x^\star)\le f(y)f(x⋆)≤f(y) for all yyy, and f⋆=f(x⋆)f^\star=f(x^\star)f⋆=f(x⋆).
  • A solution of the ODE (3) with initial point x0x_0x0​ is a curve XXX on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), twice continuously differentiable on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) and continuously differentiable on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), with X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​, X˙(0)=0\dot X(0)=0X˙(0)=0, and X¨(t)+3tX˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0\ddot X(t)+\frac3t\dot X(t)+\nabla f(X(t))=0X¨(t)+t3​X˙(t)+∇f(X(t))=0 for every t>0t>0t>0. The damping coefficient 3/t3/t3/t is singular at t=0t=0t=0; the paper's Theorem 1 shows that a unique such solution exists for every f∈F∞f\in\mathcal F_\inftyf∈F∞​.
  • The energy along a solution is
E(t)=t2(f(X(t))−f⋆)+2∥X(t)+t2X˙(t)−x⋆∥2.\mathcal E(t)=t^2\big(f(X(t))-f^\star\big)+2\Big\|X(t)+\frac t2\dot X(t)-x^\star\Big\|^2 .E(t)=t2(f(X(t))−f⋆)+2​X(t)+2t​X˙(t)−x⋆​2.

In the Lean development these are IsFL, IsFinfty, IsSolution f 3 x₀ X V and energy f xstar X V t, in the namespace NesterovODE.Rate, where V is the velocity X˙\dot XX˙.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 7)

For every f∈F∞f\in\mathcal F_\inftyf∈F∞​, every minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆, every x0x_0x0​ and every solution XXX of (3),

f(X(t))−f⋆≤2∥x0−x⋆∥2t2for all t>0.f(X(t))-f^\star\le\frac{2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{t^2}\qquad\text{for all }t>0.f(X(t))−f⋆≤t22∥x0​−x⋆∥2​for all t>0.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3, pp. 7–8)

  1. Derivative of the energy. For t>0t>0t>0,
E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+t2⟨∇f(X),X˙⟩+4⟨X+t2X˙−x⋆,32X˙+t2X¨⟩.\dot{\mathcal E}=2t(f(X)-f^\star)+t^2\langle\nabla f(X),\dot X\rangle+4\Big\langle X+\frac t2\dot X-x^\star,\frac32\dot X+\frac t2\ddot X\Big\rangle .E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+t2⟨∇f(X),X˙⟩+4⟨X+2t​X˙−x⋆,23​X˙+2t​X¨⟩.
  1. The energy is nonincreasing. Using the ODE,
E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+4⟨X−x⋆,−t2∇f(X)⟩=2t(f(X)−f⋆)−2t⟨X−x⋆,∇f(X)⟩≤0.\dot{\mathcal E}=2t(f(X)-f^\star)+4\Big\langle X-x^\star,-\frac t2\nabla f(X)\Big\rangle=2t(f(X)-f^\star)-2t\langle X-x^\star,\nabla f(X)\rangle\le0 .E˙=2t(f(X)−f⋆)+4⟨X−x⋆,−2t​∇f(X)⟩=2t(f(X)−f⋆)−2t⟨X−x⋆,∇f(X)⟩≤0.
  1. The bound chain. E\mathcal EE is nonincreasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) and, for t>0t>0t>0,
f(X(t))−f⋆≤E(t)t2≤E(0)t2=2∥x0−x⋆∥2t2.f(X(t))-f^\star\le\frac{\mathcal E(t)}{t^2}\le\frac{\mathcal E(0)}{t^2}=\frac{2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{t^2}.f(X(t))−f⋆≤t2E(t)​≤t2E(0)​=t22∥x0​−x⋆∥2​.

Significance

Theorem 3 is the statement that makes the ODE a faithful model of Nesterov's scheme at the level of rates: under t≈kst\approx k\sqrt st≈ks​, the bound (7) reproduces the discrete bound (6) with the same constant 2. The paper also shows that the constant cannot be improved (p. 8). The energy E\mathcal EE is the continuous analogue of the potential used in discrete proofs, and the same template, with other weights, gives the paper's later results on the generalized damping r/tr/tr/t and on strongly convex objectives.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as the platform and Mathlib are concerned it is not formalized: Mathlib has the calculus (derivatives of inner products and norms along curves, the first-order characterization of convexity, monotonicity from a sign of the derivative) but no statement about this ODE. A machine-checked proof establishes the Lyapunov argument for the singular-at-zero system, including the endpoint t=0t=0t=0 where only one-sided regularity is available, and supplies reusable lemmas for the other missions of this series and for formalizations of inertial dynamics with vanishing damping.

Difficulty

The algebra is short; the care lies in the analytic bookkeeping that the paper leaves implicit.

  • The energy is defined through f∘Xf\circ Xf∘X and ∥X+t2X˙−x⋆∥2\|X+\frac t2\dot X-x^\star\|^2∥X+2t​X˙−x⋆∥2, so its derivative needs the chain rule for a C1C^1C1 function along a differentiable curve and the derivative of a squared norm of a curve.
  • The ODE holds only for t>0t>0t>0 and the coefficient 3/t3/t3/t blows up at 000. Monotonicity of E\mathcal EE on the closed half-line therefore needs right-continuity of E\mathcal EE at 000, which follows from right-continuity of XXX and X˙\dot XX˙ there, together with tX˙(t)→0t\dot X(t)\to0tX˙(t)→0; the derivative argument alone gives monotonicity only on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞).
  • The sign of E˙\dot{\mathcal E}E˙ needs the first-order inequality f(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩f(x^\star)\ge f(X)+\langle\nabla f(X),x^\star-X\ranglef(x⋆)≥f(X)+⟨∇f(X),x⋆−X⟩ for a differentiable convex function.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient f. f∈FLf\in\mathcal F_Lf∈FL​ is 0 < L ∧ ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ f ∧ ContDiff ℝ 1 f ∧ LipschitzWith L (gradient f) with L : NNReal.
  • A solution is encoded as a pair of curves (X,V)(X,V)(X,V): X(0)=x0X(0)=x_0X(0)=x0​, V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0, XXX has right derivative V(0)V(0)V(0) at 000, VVV is right-continuous at 000, and for every t>0t>0t>0, XXX has derivative V(t)V(t)V(t) and VVV has derivative −3tV(t)−∇f(X(t))-\frac3tV(t)-\nabla f(X(t))−t3​V(t)−∇f(X(t)). For continuous ∇f\nabla f∇f this is exactly the paper's regularity class C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞))C^2((0,\infty))\cap C^1([0,\infty))C2((0,∞))∩C1([0,∞)) with the ODE and the initial conditions. Values of XXX for t<0t<0t<0 are unconstrained and never used.
  • The paper states Theorem 3 for "the unique global solution". The Lean statements quantify over every solution and every minimizer, which by Theorem 1 is the same statement and does not depend on Theorem 1 (formalized in a separate mission of this series).
  • No hypothesis beyond the paper's is added. The Lipschitz constant is part of F∞\mathcal F_\inftyF∞​ and is kept although the proof of Theorem 3 does not use it quantitatively.
  • The bound is stated for t>0t>0t>0 only. At t=0t=0t=0 the right-hand side 2∥x0−x⋆∥2/02\|x_0-x^\star\|^2/02∥x0​−x⋆∥2/0 is 000 in Lean, and the inequality would be false.
  • The derivative statements use HasDerivAt rather than deriv, so no derivative silently takes the default value 000; the solution predicate is satisfiable (for f(x)=∥x∥2/2f(x)=\|x\|^2/2f(x)=∥x∥2/2, x0=0x_0=0x0​=0, the zero curve is a solution), so the goal is not vacuous.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the three milestones and of the goal; general lemmas on the derivative of t↦f(X(t))t\mapsto f(X(t))t↦f(X(t)) and t↦∥X(t)+t2V(t)−x⋆∥2t\mapsto\|X(t)+\frac t2V(t)-x^\star\|^2t↦∥X(t)+2t​V(t)−x⋆∥2; and the first-order convexity inequality in gradient form, which the strongly convex and generalized-damping missions of this series also need.

Selected references

  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153):1–43, 2016; cited from arXiv:1503.01243v2, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Mathematics Doklady 27(2):372–376, 1983.
  • A. Wibisono, A. C. Wilson, M. I. Jordan, A variational perspective on accelerated methods in optimization, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 113(47):E7351–E7358, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.1614734113
  • H. Attouch, Z. Chbani, J. Peypouquet, P. Redont, Fast convergence of inertial dynamics and algorithms with asymptotic vanishing viscosity, Math. Program. 168:123–175, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-1065-5
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster First-Order Primal-Dual Methods for Linear Programming using Restarts and Sharpness III: Adaptive Restarts Take at Most ⌈2C(q+2)/(αβ)⌉ Inner Steps and Converge Linearly on Sharp ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

First order primal–dual algorithms are used when a linear program is too large for a direct factorization or when matrix operations are cheaper than solving a sequence of linear systems. Their basic guarantees often bound an averaged duality gap by a quantity proportional to 1/t1/t1/t after ttt steps. A restart discards the current inner iteration history and begins again from an averaged output. For problems with a suitable error bound, restarts can turn sublinear progress into geometric decrease in distance to the solution set. Applegate, Hinder, Lu and Lubin analyze this mechanism for a class that includes proximal point, extragradient, primal–dual hybrid gradient and ADMM methods, with constants listed in their Table 1. Their adaptive rule is useful when the sharpness constant is unavailable to the algorithm designer. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, §§2–4

Setting

Let X⊆RnX\subseteq\mathbb R^nX⊆Rn and Y⊆RmY\subseteq\mathbb R^mY⊆Rm be closed convex sets. The primal–dual problem is min⁡x∈Xmax⁡y∈YL(x,y)\min_{x\in X}\max_{y\in Y}L(x,y)minx∈X​maxy∈Y​L(x,y), where LLL is differentiable, convex in xxx and concave in yyy. A point z=(x,y)z=(x,y)z=(x,y) is feasible when z∈Z=X×Yz\in Z=X\times Yz∈Z=X×Y. Its saddle-point set Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆ contains the feasible pairs satisfying L(x,y′)≤L(x,y)≤L(x′,y)L(x,y')\le L(x,y)\le L(x',y)L(x,y′)≤L(x,y)≤L(x′,y) for every x′∈Xx'\in Xx′∈X and y′∈Yy'\in Yy′∈Y. Distances and balls use a chosen seminorm ∥⋅∥p\|\cdot\|_p∥⋅∥p​; this matters for methods whose natural geometry is degenerate. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 2–3

For r>0r>0r>0, put Wr(z)={z^∈Z:∥z−z^∥p≤r}W_r(z)=\{\hat z\in Z:\|z-\hat z\|_p\le r\}Wr​(z)={z^∈Z:∥z−z^∥p​≤r}. The normalized duality gap is ρr(z)=sup⁡z^∈Wr(z)[L(x,y^)−L(x^,y)]/r\rho_r(z)=\sup_{\hat z\in W_r(z)}[L(x,\hat y)-L(\hat x,y)]/rρr​(z)=supz^∈Wr​(z)​[L(x,y^​)−L(x^,y)]/r. At r=0r=0r=0 it is the upper limit as positive radii decrease to zero. The gap can be infinite under a seminorm, so its values are extended real. A problem is α\alphaα-sharp on S⊆ZS\subseteq ZS⊆Z when αdist⁡p(z,Z⋆)≤ρr(z)\alpha\operatorname{dist}_p(z,Z^\star)\le\rho_r(z)αdistp​(z,Z⋆)≤ρr​(z) for every z∈Sz\in Sz∈S and every 0<r≤diam⁡p(S)0<r\le\operatorname{diam}_p(S)0<r≤diamp​(S). This condition connects a computable local gap to the distance of interest. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 3, 11, (4), Definition 1

The base algorithm begins at z0∈Zz^0\in Zz0∈Z and supplies averaged outputs zˉt\bar z^tzˉt for positive inner times ttt. Property 3 requires constants q,C>0q,C>0q,C>0, uniform over every feasible start and output run, for which zˉt∈Z\bar z^t\in Zzˉt∈Z, ρ∥zˉt−z0∥p(zˉt)≤2C∥zˉt−z0∥p/t\rho_{\|\bar z^t-z^0\|_p}(\bar z^t)\le2C\|\bar z^t-z^0\|_p/tρ∥zˉt−z0∥p​​(zˉt)≤2C∥zˉt−z0∥p​/t, and ∥zˉt−z0∥p≤(q+2)dist⁡p(z0,Z⋆)\|\bar z^t-z^0\|_p\le(q+2)\operatorname{dist}_p(z^0,Z^\star)∥zˉt−z0∥p​≤(q+2)distp​(z0,Z⋆). An outer run starts at zk,0z^{k,0}zk,0, runs its inner algorithm for τk\tau^kτk steps, and sets zk+1,0=zˉk,τkz^{k+1,0}=\bar z^{k,\tau^k}zk+1,0=zˉk,τk. Its first length τ0≥1\tau^0\ge1τ0≥1 is selected by the user. At later outer indices, it restarts at the first positive time when the normalized gap has fallen below β\betaβ times the gap at the previous outer transition, with 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 9–10, 15–16, Property 3, Algorithm 1, (30)

Formalization targets

The goal is both parts of Theorem 2. Assume all outer starts lie in one set SSS on which the problem is α\alphaα-sharp, with α>0\alpha>0α>0. Define the ceiling time t⋆=⌈2C(q+2)/(αβ)⌉t^\star=\left\lceil2C(q+2)/(\alpha\beta)\right\rceilt⋆=⌈2C(q+2)/(αβ)⌉. For every k≥1k\ge1k≥1 the target is

τk≤t⋆,dist⁡p(zk,0,Z⋆)≤βkt⋆τ0dist⁡p(z0,0,Z⋆).\tau^k\le t^\star, \qquad \operatorname{dist}_p(z^{k,0},Z^\star) \le\beta^k\frac{t^\star}{\tau^0}\operatorname{dist}_p(z^{0,0},Z^\star).τk≤t⋆,distp​(zk,0,Z⋆)≤βkτ0t⋆​distp​(z0,0,Z⋆).

The milestones are Proposition 8's treatment of zero displacement, the displayed restart comparison in the proof of (33), the bound (33) itself, and the repeated normalized-gap inequality in the proof of part (ii). Each is tied to the arXiv version's printed page and label. The assertion begins at k=1k=1k=1: the first interval is free and need not be at most t⋆t^\start⋆. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 17–18

Significance

The first conclusion gives a uniform bound on the inner work of every subsequent adaptive interval. The second translates the gap-based restart rule into a geometric distance guarantee while retaining the user-selected first interval as a visible factor. Together, they explain why an algorithm that does not know α\alphaα can have the same characteristic restart scale as one using a fixed frequency chosen from α\alphaα. The paper proves this theorem and gives linear-programming settings in which its sharpness premise holds; this mission asks for a machine-checked statement and, eventually, a machine-checked proof of that known result. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, Theorems 1–2 and Lemma 5

Formalizing the result also produces reusable interfaces for saddle sets, seminorm distances, localized duality gaps, uniform algorithm properties, and first-trigger restart runs. Those interfaces can support other primal–dual analyses without committing to a particular inner update map. A complete proof can later connect Property 3 to the paper's individual algorithms, while this mission preserves the abstract theorem that they share. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, Proposition 4 and §4

Difficulty

The restart test uses a gap evaluated at the moving radius ∥zˉk,t−zk,0∥p\|\bar z^{k,t}-z^{k,0}\|_p∥zˉk,t−zk,0∥p​, whereas sharpness relates a gap at the radius of the previous outer transition to distance from Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆. This mismatch must be reconciled while preserving the exact ceiling constant. A zero seminorm displacement is a separate boundary case: sharpness only speaks about positive radii, but the algorithm can still encounter radius zero. The theorem also needs the first qualifying time; knowing merely that a later time satisfies the test gives no upper bound on the interval length. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 16–18

Formalization scope

Lean represents xxx and yyy by finite-dimensional Euclidean spaces and zzz by their product, allowing either dimension to be zero. The geometry on that product is an explicit Seminorm, never the product type's default norm. Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆ is the set of saddle pairs. The standing problem predicate includes closed convex feasible sets, separate convexity and concavity, and differentiability on the whole ambient product space. It also requires Z⋆≠∅Z^\star\ne\varnothingZ⋆=∅, a disclosed strengthening of the paper's standing feasibility and finite-optimum assumptions so the real-valued distance to Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆ cannot collapse to an empty-infimum default. The infimum defining distance is over saddle points only; the supremum defining the gap is over feasible pairs only. The normalized gap and diameter use extended reals so an unbounded seminorm ball does not silently acquire value zero. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 2–4

The base method is a relation from a start to possible averaged-output sequences. Property 3 fixes q,Cq,Cq,C before quantifying over starts, runs and positive times. The theorem assumes initial feasibility; Property 3 then makes restarted outer points feasible. An adaptive run records the positive first interval and the first qualifying positive time for each later interval. The ceiling is Nat.ceil; the factor t⋆/τ0t^\star/\tau^0t⋆/τ0 is division in the reals. A formalization with arbitrarily chosen qualifying restart times, sharpness only along one chosen trajectory, a real-valued supremum over an unbounded ball, or a vacuous solution set would change the result. Contributions to the gap and seminorm infrastructure and to either half of Theorem 2 are useful; the individual algorithm implementations are outside this mission's core. Applegate et al., arXiv:2105.12715v4, pp. 9–10, 16–18

Selected references

  • D. Applegate, O. Hinder, H. Lu and M. Lubin, Faster First-Order Primal-Dual Methods for Linear Programming using Restarts and Sharpness, Mathematical Programming, 2022; mission citation basis: arXiv:2105.12715v4.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Faster First-Order Primal-Dual Methods for Linear Programming using Restarts and Sharpness II: Fixed-Frequency Restarts Shrink the Distance to the Solution Set by β per Restart on Sharp ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

Linear programs at very large scale are increasingly solved by first-order primal-dual methods, which use only matrix-vector products instead of matrix factorizations. Such methods parallelize well and have a small memory footprint, but on their own they are slow to reach moderate or high accuracy. Applegate, Hinder, Lu and Lubin (arXiv:2105.12715, Math. Program. 2022) showed that periodically restarting a primal-dual method from the average of its iterates turns its sublinear ergodic rate into a linear rate on sharp problems, a class that contains every linear program. The analysis underlies PDLP, a restarted PDHG solver studied computationally by Applegate et al. (arXiv:2106.04756) and shipped in Google OR-Tools.

This mission formalizes the paper's first convergence theorem: with restarts at a fixed frequency, the distance from the restart points to the solution set shrinks by a factor β\betaβ per restart.

Setting

Let X⊆RnX \subseteq \mathbb R^nX⊆Rn and Y⊆RmY \subseteq \mathbb R^mY⊆Rm be closed convex sets and let L(x,y)L(x, y)L(x,y) be differentiable, convex in xxx and concave in yyy. Problem (1) is

min⁡x∈Xmax⁡y∈YL(x,y),\min_{x \in X} \max_{y \in Y} L(x, y),x∈Xmin​y∈Ymax​L(x,y),

with feasible region Z=X×YZ = X \times YZ=X×Y and primal-dual points z=(x,y)z = (x, y)z=(x,y). Its solution set Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆ is the set of saddle points z⋆∈Zz^\star \in Zz⋆∈Z: L(x⋆,y′)≤L(x⋆,y⋆)≤L(x′,y⋆)L(x^\star, y') \le L(x^\star, y^\star) \le L(x', y^\star)L(x⋆,y′)≤L(x⋆,y⋆)≤L(x′,y⋆) for all x′∈Xx' \in Xx′∈X, y′∈Yy' \in Yy′∈Y. Throughout, Z⋆≠∅Z^\star \neq \emptysetZ⋆=∅.

Distances are measured in a semi-norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, which the paper allows in order to cover ADMM. Write dist⁡(z,Z⋆)=inf⁡z⋆∈Z⋆∥z−z⋆∥\operatorname{dist}(z, Z^\star) = \inf_{z^\star \in Z^\star}\|z - z^\star\|dist(z,Z⋆)=infz⋆∈Z⋆​∥z−z⋆∥, diam⁡(S)=sup⁡s,s′∈S∥s−s′∥\operatorname{diam}(S) = \sup_{s, s' \in S}\|s - s'\|diam(S)=sups,s′∈S​∥s−s′∥, and Wr(z)={z^∈Z:∥z−z^∥≤r}W_r(z) = \{\hat z \in Z : \|z - \hat z\| \le r\}Wr​(z)={z^∈Z:∥z−z^∥≤r}. The primal-dual gap (3) at zzz is sup⁡z^∈Z{L(x,y^)−L(x^,y)}\sup_{\hat z \in Z}\{L(x, \hat y) - L(\hat x, y)\}supz^∈Z​{L(x,y^​)−L(x^,y)}, and the normalized duality gap (4a)–(4b) is

ρr(z)=1rsup⁡z^∈Wr(z){L(x,y^)−L(x^,y)}(r>0),ρ0(z)=lim sup⁡r→0+ρr(z).\rho_r(z) = \frac{1}{r}\sup_{\hat z \in W_r(z)}\{L(x, \hat y) - L(\hat x, y)\} \quad (r > 0), \qquad \rho_0(z) = \limsup_{r \to 0^+}\rho_r(z).ρr​(z)=r1​z^∈Wr​(z)sup​{L(x,y^​)−L(x^,y)}(r>0),ρ0​(z)=r→0+limsup​ρr​(z).

By Definition 1, problem (1) is α\alphaα-sharp on S⊆ZS \subseteq ZS⊆Z if αdist⁡(z,Z⋆)≤ρr(z)\alpha\operatorname{dist}(z, Z^\star) \le \rho_r(z)αdist(z,Z⋆)≤ρr​(z) for all z∈Sz \in Sz∈S and all r∈(0,diam⁡(S)]r \in (0, \operatorname{diam}(S)]r∈(0,diam(S)].

The base method is abstract. From a start z0z^0z0 it outputs averaged points zˉt\bar z^tzˉt, t≥1t \ge 1t≥1. It has Property 3 with constants q,C>0q, C > 0q,C>0 if, for every start z0∈Zz^0 \in Zz0∈Z and every t≥1t \ge 1t≥1, zˉt∈Z\bar z^t \in Zzˉt∈Z and

i. ρ∥zˉt−z0∥(zˉt)≤2C∥zˉt−z0∥/t\rho_{\|\bar z^t - z^0\|}(\bar z^t) \le 2C\|\bar z^t - z^0\|/tρ∥zˉt−z0∥​(zˉt)≤2C∥zˉt−z0∥/t,

ii. ∥zˉt−z0∥≤(q+2)dist⁡(z0,Z⋆)\|\bar z^t - z^0\| \le (q + 2)\operatorname{dist}(z^0, Z^\star)∥zˉt−z0∥≤(q+2)dist(z0,Z⋆).

Algorithm 1 with fixed-frequency restarts (29) runs the base method from zn,0z^{n,0}zn,0 for

t⋆=⌈2C(q+2)αβ⌉t^\star = \left\lceil \frac{2C(q+2)}{\alpha\beta}\right\rceilt⋆=⌈αβ2C(q+2)​⌉

steps, sets zn+1,0=zˉn,t⋆z^{n+1,0} = \bar z^{n,t^\star}zn+1,0=zˉn,t⋆, and repeats, with β∈(0,1)\beta \in (0, 1)β∈(0,1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 17)

If the base method has Property 3 and (1) is α\alphaα-sharp on WR(z0,0)W_R(z^{0,0})WR​(z0,0) with R=q+21−βdist⁡(z0,0,Z⋆)R = \frac{q+2}{1-\beta}\operatorname{dist}(z^{0,0}, Z^\star)R=1−βq+2​dist(z0,0,Z⋆), then for every n≥0n \ge 0n≥0

dist⁡(zn,0,Z⋆)≤βndist⁡(z0,0,Z⋆).(31)\operatorname{dist}(z^{n,0}, Z^\star) \le \beta^n \operatorname{dist}(z^{0,0}, Z^\star). \tag{31}dist(zn,0,Z⋆)≤βndist(z0,0,Z⋆).(31)

Milestones

  1. Proposition 5 (p. 11): for z∈Zz \in Zz∈Z, ρr(z)\rho_r(z)ρr​(z) is non-increasing in r∈[0,∞)r \in [0, \infty)r∈[0,∞).
  2. Proposition 6 (p. 11): for z∈Zz \in Zz∈Z and r≥0r \ge 0r≥0, the primal-dual gap at zzz is zero if and only if ρr(z)=0\rho_r(z) = 0ρr​(z)=0.
  3. Proposition 8 (p. 17): under Property 3, ∥zˉt−z0∥=0\|\bar z^t - z^0\| = 0∥zˉt−z0∥=0 implies zˉt∈Z⋆\bar z^t \in Z^\starzˉt∈Z⋆.
  4. First display of the proof of Theorem 1 (p. 17): if (31) holds for all n≤Nn \le Nn≤N, then ∥zN+1,0−z0,0∥≤R\|z^{N+1,0} - z^{0,0}\| \le R∥zN+1,0−z0,0∥≤R, so zN+1,0∈WR(z0,0)z^{N+1,0} \in W_R(z^{0,0})zN+1,0∈WR​(z0,0).
  5. Display (32) (p. 17): if zN,0,zN+1,0∈WR(z0,0)z^{N,0}, z^{N+1,0} \in W_R(z^{0,0})zN,0,zN+1,0∈WR​(z0,0), then
dist⁡(zN+1,0,Z⋆)≤βdist⁡(zN,0,Z⋆).\operatorname{dist}(z^{N+1,0}, Z^\star) \le \beta\operatorname{dist}(z^{N,0}, Z^\star).dist(zN+1,0,Z⋆)≤βdist(zN,0,Z⋆).

Companion statements

Proposition 2 (p. 8) and Proposition 4 (p. 10) show where Property 3 comes from. A generic algorithm (6) with iterates ztz^tzt and targets z^t\hat z^tz^t has Property 1 with CCC if L(x^t+1,y)−L(x,y^t+1)≤C2∥z−zt∥2−C2∥z−zt+1∥2L(\hat x^{t+1}, y) - L(x, \hat y^{t+1}) \le \frac C2\|z - z^t\|^2 - \frac C2\|z - z^{t+1}\|^2L(x^t+1,y)−L(x,y^​t+1)≤2C​∥z−zt∥2−2C​∥z−zt+1∥2 for every z∈Zz \in Zz∈Z (12). It has Property 2 with qqq if ∥z^t−zt∥≤qdist⁡(zt,Z⋆)\|\hat z^t - z^t\| \le q\operatorname{dist}(z^t, Z^\star)∥z^t−zt∥≤qdist(zt,Z⋆) or ∥z^t−zt−1∥≤qdist⁡(zt,Z⋆)\|\hat z^t - z^{t-1}\| \le q\operatorname{dist}(z^t, Z^\star)∥z^t−zt−1∥≤qdist(zt,Z⋆).

  • Proposition 2: Property 1 gives non-expansiveness ∥zt+1−z⋆∥≤∥zt−z⋆∥\|z^{t+1} - z^\star\| \le \|z^t - z^\star\|∥zt+1−z⋆∥≤∥zt−z⋆∥ and the ergodic rate L(xˉt,y)−L(x,yˉt)≤C∥z−z0∥2/(2t)L(\bar x^t, y) - L(x, \bar y^t) \le C\|z - z^0\|^2/(2t)L(xˉt,y)−L(x,yˉ​t)≤C∥z−z0∥2/(2t).
  • Proposition 4: Properties 1 and 2 give Property 3 for the averages zˉt=1t∑i=1tz^i\bar z^t = \frac1t\sum_{i=1}^t \hat z^izˉt=t1​∑i=1t​z^i, with the same qqq and CCC.

Fact 1 (p. 11), that rρr(z)r\rho_r(z)rρr​(z) is non-decreasing in rrr, is included as well.

Significance

Theorem 1 converts any primal-dual method with an O(1/t)O(1/t)O(1/t) ergodic rate on the normalized duality gap into a linearly convergent method on sharp problems. The rate is O(Cαlog⁡1ϵ)O\big(\frac{C}{\alpha}\log\frac1\epsilon\big)O(αC​logϵ1​) iterations to reach dist⁡(z,Z⋆)≤ϵ\operatorname{dist}(z, Z^\star) \le \epsilondist(z,Z⋆)≤ϵ (Remark 3). Through Proposition 4 it applies to PPM, EGM, PDHG and ADMM. Combined with the paper's Lemma 5, which shows that linear programs are sharp with α\alphaα the inverse of a Hoffman constant, it yields linear convergence of restarted PDHG for LP. The paper also shows that this rate matches a lower bound for a general class of primal-dual methods.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as is known, no part of it, and no normalized duality gap or primal-dual sharpness notion, has a machine-checked proof. The mission adds a checked version of the restart argument, with every degenerate case resolved: zero displacements, unbounded balls, and semi-norms that are not norms.

Difficulty

Each proof is short, but the statements are delicate in ways the paper passes over.

  • The paper's argmax over Wr(z)W_r(z)Wr​(z) need not exist under a semi-norm, and ρr(z)\rho_r(z)ρr​(z) may be +∞+\infty+∞. Proposition 5 therefore has to be proved with suprema, through the convex-combination scaling z+r1r2(z^−z)z + \frac{r_1}{r_2}(\hat z - z)z+r2​r1​​(z^−z), not with a maximizer.
  • Sharpness is only available at radii in (0,diam⁡(WR(z0,0))](0, \operatorname{diam}(W_R(z^{0,0}))](0,diam(WR​(z0,0))] and only at points of WR(z0,0)W_R(z^{0,0})WR​(z0,0). So the induction in Theorem 1 must carry two facts together: the contraction (31), and the fact that every restart point stays in WR(z0,0)W_R(z^{0,0})WR​(z0,0).
  • The step size r=∥zN+1,0−zN,0∥r = \|z^{N+1,0} - z^{N,0}\|r=∥zN+1,0−zN,0∥ may be zero, which is why Proposition 8, and through it Propositions 5 and 6 at r=0r = 0r=0, is needed.

A direct contraction argument that applies sharpness at an arbitrary radius, or on all of ZZZ, does not prove the theorem as stated.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rm\mathbb R^mRm are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m). n=0n = 0n=0 and m=0m = 0m=0 are allowed.
  • The semi-norm is an arbitrary Seminorm ℝ on their product, never the product's built-in norm.
  • The primal-dual gap, ρr\rho_rρr​ and diam⁡\operatorname{diam}diam are suprema in EReal, so unbounded sets give +∞+\infty+∞ and not a junk 000. dist⁡(⋅,Z⋆)\operatorname{dist}(\cdot, Z^\star)dist(⋅,Z⋆) is a real infimum over the nonempty set Z⋆Z^\starZ⋆.
  • The base method is a map from starts to sets of admissible output sequences, because a primal-dual step can be an argmin and need not be single-valued. Property 3 quantifies over every start in ZZZ and every run, with qqq and CCC fixed first.
  • The restart length is the natural number ⌈2C(q+2)/(αβ)⌉\lceil 2C(q+2)/(\alpha\beta)\rceil⌈2C(q+2)/(αβ)⌉, and every inner loop has exactly this length.

Standing assumptions and added hypotheses:

  • XXX and YYY are closed and convex, and LLL is convex-concave and differentiable on the whole space.
  • Z⋆≠∅Z^\star \neq \emptysetZ⋆=∅ replaces the page's "non-empty feasible region and bounded optimal value".
  • α>0\alpha > 0α>0 is assumed.
  • Property 1 is required for every t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, although the paper's N\mathbb NN starts at one: the proof of Proposition 2 telescopes from z0z^0z0.
  • The iterates of a generic algorithm stay in ZZZ, which the page leaves implicit.

Departures from the page:

  • Proposition 8 asserts only zˉt∈Z⋆\bar z^t \in Z^\starzˉt∈Z⋆. The page's "zˉn,t=zn,0\bar z^{n,t} = z^{n,0}zˉn,t=zn,0" does not follow under a semi-norm.
  • Milestones that do not use a standing assumption drop it.

The goal is not trivialized by its hypotheses. A companion check file exhibits L(x,y)=xyL(x, y) = xyL(x,y)=xy on R×R\mathbb R \times \mathbb RR×R, with the sup norm and an oracle base method, on which every hypothesis of Theorem 1 holds and dist⁡(z0,0,Z⋆)=1\operatorname{dist}(z^{0,0}, Z^\star) = 1dist(z0,0,Z⋆)=1. Sharpness is assumed only where Definition 1 and the theorem assume it: replacing WR(z0,0)W_R(z^{0,0})WR​(z0,0) by ZZZ, or the radius range by all r>0r > 0r>0, would weaken the theorem.

A complete development needs elementary facts about suprema in EReal, Jensen's inequality for convex-concave functions on averages, and geometric sums. The definitions of ρr\rho_rρr​, sharpness and Property 3 are reusable for the adaptive-restart theorem of the same paper (Theorem 2, a separate mission) and for other restart analyses. Proofs of any milestone or companion are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Applegate, O. Hinder, H. Lu, M. Lubin, Faster First-Order Primal-Dual Methods for Linear Programming using Restarts and Sharpness, Math. Program. (2022); arXiv:2105.12715v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/2105.12715 · https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-022-01901-9
  • D. Applegate, M. Díaz, O. Hinder, H. Lu, M. Lubin, B. O'Donoghue, W. Schudy, Practical Large-Scale Linear Programming using Primal-Dual Hybrid Gradient, NeurIPS 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/2106.04756
  • A. Chambolle, T. Pock, A First-Order Primal-Dual Algorithm for Convex Problems with Applications to Imaging, J. Math. Imaging Vision 40 (2011). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10851-010-0251-1
  • A. Nemirovski, Prox-Method with Rate of Convergence O(1/t) for Variational Inequalities with Lipschitz Continuous Monotone Operators and Smooth Convex-Concave Saddle Point Problems, SIAM J. Optim. 15 (2004). https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623403425629
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization 3: The Big-M Relaxation Is at Least as Strong as PR(∞) for M ≤ ½√(λ0/λ2) and at Most as Strong for M ≥ √(λ0/λ2)Research Paper

Motivation

Best subset selection with a ridge term, the ℓ0ℓ2\ell_0\ell_2ℓ0​ℓ2​-regularized least squares problem

min⁡β∈Rp 12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∥β∥0+λ2∥β∥22,\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}\ \tfrac12\|y - X\beta\|_2^2 + \lambda_0\|\beta\|_0 + \lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^2,β∈Rpmin​ 21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​∥β∥0​+λ2​∥β∥22​,

is a standard model for sparse linear regression. It can be solved to certified optimality by branch-and-bound (BnB) over a mixed integer formulation, and the speed of BnB depends on how tight the lower bounds of its node relaxations are. Two mixed integer formulations are in common use: the Big-M formulation, which links each coefficient to a binary indicator through a box ∣βi∣≤Mzi|\beta_i| \le M z_i∣βi​∣≤Mzi​ (Bertsimas, King and Mazumder, 2016), and the perspective formulation, which replaces βi2\beta_i^2βi2​ by an auxiliary variable constrained by a rotated second-order cone (Frangioni and Gentile, 2006; Günlük and Linderoth, 2010). Which formulation gives the stronger continuous relaxation decides which one a solver should be built on.

Hazimeh, Mazumder and Saab (2021) compare the relaxations in Section 2. Their Proposition 2 compares the interval relaxation of the Big-M formulation with that of the perspective formulation without a box, PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞), studied by Dong, Chen and Linderoth (2015). This mission formalizes that comparison.

Setting

Fix a design matrix X∈Rn×pX \in \mathbb R^{n\times p}X∈Rn×p, a response y∈Rny \in \mathbb R^ny∈Rn, parameters λ0,λ2>0\lambda_0, \lambda_2 > 0λ0​,λ2​>0 and a bound M>0M > 0M>0. Write [p]={1,…,p}[p] = \{1,\dots,p\}[p]={1,…,p} and ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty \le M∥β∥∞​≤M for ∣βi∣≤M|\beta_i| \le M∣βi​∣≤M for every i∈[p]i \in [p]i∈[p].

The Big-M formulation (2) is

min⁡β,z 12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∑i∈[p]zi+λ2∥β∥22s.t.−Mzi≤βi≤Mzi, zi∈{0,1}.\min_{\beta, z}\ \tfrac12\|y - X\beta\|_2^2 + \lambda_0\sum_{i\in[p]} z_i + \lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^2 \quad\text{s.t.}\quad -Mz_i \le \beta_i \le Mz_i,\ z_i\in\{0,1\}.β,zmin​ 21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​i∈[p]∑​zi​+λ2​∥β∥22​s.t.−Mzi​≤βi​≤Mzi​, zi​∈{0,1}.

Its interval relaxation replaces zi∈{0,1}z_i \in \{0,1\}zi​∈{0,1} by zi∈[0,1]z_i \in [0,1]zi​∈[0,1]; its optimal value is VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​. Eliminating zzz gives the equivalent form (37),

VB(M)=min⁡∥β∥∞≤MH(β),H(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i∈[p](λ0M∣βi∣+λ2βi2).V_{B(M)} = \min_{\|\beta\|_\infty\le M} H(\beta),\qquad H(\beta) = \tfrac12\|y - X\beta\|_2^2 + \sum_{i\in[p]}\Big(\frac{\lambda_0}{M}|\beta_i| + \lambda_2\beta_i^2\Big).VB(M)​=∥β∥∞​≤Mmin​H(β),H(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∈[p]∑​(Mλ0​​∣βi​∣+λ2​βi2​).

The reverse Huber penalty is B(t)=∣t∣\mathcal B(t) = |t|B(t)=∣t∣ for ∣t∣≤1|t| \le 1∣t∣≤1 and B(t)=(t2+1)/2\mathcal B(t) = (t^2+1)/2B(t)=(t2+1)/2 for ∣t∣≥1|t| \ge 1∣t∣≥1, and ψ1(b;λ0,λ2)=2λ0B(bλ2/λ0)\psi_1(b;\lambda_0,\lambda_2) = 2\lambda_0\mathcal B(b\sqrt{\lambda_2/\lambda_0})ψ1​(b;λ0​,λ2​)=2λ0​B(bλ2​/λ0​​). The interval relaxation of PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) has the value (6),

VPR(∞)=min⁡β∈RpG(β),G(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i∈[p]ψ1(βi;λ0,λ2).V_{PR(\infty)} = \min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p} G(\beta),\qquad G(\beta) = \tfrac12\|y - X\beta\|_2^2 + \sum_{i\in[p]}\psi_1(\beta_i;\lambda_0,\lambda_2).VPR(∞)​=β∈Rpmin​G(β),G(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∈[p]∑​ψ1​(βi​;λ0​,λ2​).

Let S(λ2)\mathcal S(\lambda_2)S(λ2​) be the set of minimizers of GGG, and, as in (9),

L(M)={λ2>0  :  ∃β∈S(λ2) with ∥β∥∞≤M}.\mathcal L(M) = \{\lambda_2 > 0 \;:\; \exists\beta\in\mathcal S(\lambda_2) \text{ with } \|\beta\|_\infty \le M\}.L(M)={λ2​>0:∃β∈S(λ2​) with ∥β∥∞​≤M}.

The comparison runs through the scalar function t(b)=2λ0B(bλ2/λ0)−λ0M∣b∣−λ2b2=ψ1(b)−(λ0M∣b∣+λ2b2)t(b) = 2\lambda_0\mathcal B(b\sqrt{\lambda_2/\lambda_0}) - \frac{\lambda_0}{M}|b| - \lambda_2 b^2 = \psi_1(b) - \big(\tfrac{\lambda_0}{M}|b| + \lambda_2 b^2\big)t(b)=2λ0​B(bλ2​/λ0​​)−Mλ0​​∣b∣−λ2​b2=ψ1​(b)−(Mλ0​​∣b∣+λ2​b2) and through v∗(M)=min⁡∥β∥∞≤MG(β)v^*(M) = \min_{\|\beta\|_\infty\le M} G(\beta)v∗(M)=min∥β∥∞​≤M​G(β).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2 (p. 7)

VB(M)≥VPR(∞)if M≤12λ0/λ2,(10)V_{B(M)} \ge V_{PR(\infty)}\quad\text{if } M \le \tfrac12\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2},\qquad (10)VB(M)​≥VPR(∞)​if M≤21​λ0​/λ2​​,(10) VB(M)≤VPR(∞)if M≥λ0/λ2 and λ2∈L(M).(11)V_{B(M)} \le V_{PR(\infty)}\quad\text{if } M \ge \sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2} \text{ and } \lambda_2 \in \mathcal L(M).\qquad (11)VB(M)​≤VPR(∞)​if M≥λ0​/λ2​​ and λ2​∈L(M).(11)

Milestones, in the order of the paper's proof

  1. (37): VB(M)=min⁡∥β∥∞≤MH(β)V_{B(M)} = \min_{\|\beta\|_\infty\le M} H(\beta)VB(M)​=min∥β∥∞​≤M​H(β), attained.
  2. (10) on its own.
  3. Lemma 1: for M≥λ0/λ2M \ge \sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}M≥λ0​/λ2​​ and b∈[−M,M]b \in [-M, M]b∈[−M,M], t(b)≥0t(b) \ge 0t(b)≥0.
  4. (41): for M≥λ0/λ2M \ge \sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}M≥λ0​/λ2​​, v∗(M)≥VB(M)v^*(M) \ge V_{B(M)}v∗(M)≥VB(M)​.

The mission also contains the scalar inequality (39) as a supporting statement (not a milestone): for M≤12λ0/λ2M \le \frac12\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}M≤21​λ0​/λ2​​ and ∣b∣≤M|b| \le M∣b∣≤M, t(b)=(2λ0λ2−λ0/M)∣b∣−λ2b2≤0t(b) = (2\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2} - \lambda_0/M)|b| - \lambda_2 b^2 \le 0t(b)=(2λ0​λ2​​−λ0​/M)∣b∣−λ2​b2≤0.

Significance

Proposition 2 says that neither relaxation dominates the other. For a tight Big-M bound the Big-M relaxation yields the larger lower bound; for a loose one, provided some optimal solution of PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) lies in the box, the perspective relaxation does. Equivalently, with the other data fixed, a small λ2\lambda_2λ2​ favours the Big-M relaxation and a large λ2\lambda_2λ2​ favours PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) (p. 8). Together with Proposition 1 of the same paper, which shows that the box-constrained perspective relaxation PR(M)\mathrm{PR}(M)PR(M) beats both when λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2} > Mλ0​/λ2​​>M, this motivates the paper's choice of PR(M)\mathrm{PR}(M)PR(M) as the formulation on which its BnB solver is built.

The proposition is proved in the paper (Appendix A, pp. 29–30). No machine-checked proof of it, of the reformulation (37), or of any property of the reverse Huber penalty exists on the platform. The mission produces a formal statement of both inequalities with every hypothesis explicit, and the definitions of the two relaxation values in a form that later missions on perspective relaxations can reuse.

Difficulty

The scalar inequalities (39) and Lemma 1 are elementary but split into cases at the kink of the reverse Huber penalty, ∣b∣=λ0/λ2|b| = \sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}∣b∣=λ0​/λ2​​, and at the sign of 2λ0λ2−λ0/M2\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2} - \lambda_0/M2λ0​λ2​​−λ0​/M. The passage from coordinatewise inequalities to optimal values is where care is needed. VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​ is defined over pairs (β,z)(\beta, z)(β,z), and its identification with a minimum of HHH over a compact box requires eliminating zzz and showing attainment. For (11) a pointwise comparison of GGG and HHH on the box only bounds VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​ by the box-restricted value v∗(M)v^*(M)v∗(M), not by VPR(∞)V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(∞)​, which is an infimum over all of Rp\mathbb R^pRp; the hypothesis λ2∈L(M)\lambda_2 \in \mathcal L(M)λ2​∈L(M) is what closes this gap, and dropping it gives a statement the paper does not prove.

Formalization scope

All declarations live in the namespace L0BnB.BigMvsPR. Vectors are Fin p → ℝ, XXX is a Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ, and XβX\betaXβ is X *ᵥ β. Every norm is an explicit sum: ∥v∥22=∑ivi2\|v\|_2^2 = \sum_i v_i^2∥v∥22​=∑i​vi2​, and ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty \le M∥β∥∞​≤M is ∀i, ∣βi∣≤M\forall i,\ |\beta_i| \le M∀i, ∣βi​∣≤M. The reverse Huber penalty is an if on ∣t∣≤1|t| \le 1∣t∣≤1.

Optimal values are real infima (sInf): VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​ over the feasible pairs (β,z)(\beta, z)(β,z) of the interval relaxation, VPR(∞)V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(∞)​ over all of Rp\mathbb R^pRp, v∗(M)v^*(M)v∗(M) over the box. For λ0,λ2>0\lambda_0, \lambda_2 > 0λ0​,λ2​>0 each set of values is nonempty (β=z=0\beta = z = 0β=z=0) and bounded below by 000, so no infimum takes Lean's junk value. VPR(∞)V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(∞)​ is defined as the displayed minimum (6); its identification with the interval relaxation of PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) is a result of Dong, Chen and Linderoth that the paper cites and does not prove, and it is not part of this mission. S(λ2)\mathcal S(\lambda_2)S(λ2​) is the set of minimizers of GGG, as the paper uses it in the proof of (11).

All theorems assume λ0,λ2,M>0\lambda_0, \lambda_2, M > 0λ0​,λ2​,M>0. The paper remarks that Proposition 2 applies for any M≥0M \ge 0M≥0; M=0M = 0M=0 is excluded because HHH and ttt divide by MMM. The goal is stated for optimal values, not for the objective functions at a single point: a pointwise comparison of HHH and GGG is a milestone, not the proposition. Milestone (37) is stated with IsLeast, so it asserts attainment as well as the value.

The paper states no O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) bounds in this result, so no constants are instantiated. Contributions welcome: proofs of the scalar lemmas, of (37) (which needs compactness of the box and continuity of HHH), and of the goal.

Selected references

  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, A. Saab, Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization, arXiv:2004.06152v2, 2021; Mathematical Programming, 2022. https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.06152
  • H. Dong, K. Chen, J. Linderoth, Regularization vs. Relaxation: A conic optimization perspective of statistical variable selection, arXiv preprint, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1510.06083
  • D. Bertsimas, A. King, R. Mazumder, Best subset selection via a modern optimization lens, The Annals of Statistics 44(2), 813–852, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1214/15-AOS1388
  • A. Frangioni, C. Gentile, Perspective cuts for a class of convex 0–1 mixed integer programs, Mathematical Programming 106(2), 225–236, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-005-0594-3
  • O. Günlük, J. Linderoth, Perspective reformulations of mixed integer nonlinear programs with indicator variables, Mathematical Programming 124(1–2), 183–205, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-010-0360-z
  • A. B. Owen, A robust hybrid of lasso and ridge regression, Contemporary Mathematics 443, 59–72, 2007 (the reverse Huber penalty).
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization 2: When √(λ0/λ2) > M the Perspective Relaxation Is at Least as Strong as the Big-M and PR(∞) RelaxationsResearch Paper

Motivation

Best subset selection with ridge shrinkage asks for a coefficient vector β∈Rp\beta\in\mathbb R^pβ∈Rp that fits a response y∈Rny\in\mathbb R^ny∈Rn through a design matrix X∈Rn×pX\in\mathbb R^{n\times p}X∈Rn×p while using few nonzero coefficients:

min⁡β∈Rp 12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∥β∥0+λ2∥β∥22.\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}\ \tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2 + \lambda_0\|\beta\|_0 + \lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^2 .β∈Rpmin​ 21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​∥β∥0​+λ2​∥β∥22​.

This ℓ0ℓ2\ell_0\ell_2ℓ0​ℓ2​-regularized least squares problem is NP-hard, and exact methods solve it as a mixed integer program by branch-and-bound (BnB). The speed of BnB is governed by the strength of the continuous relaxation solved at every node: a larger relaxation value prunes more nodes. Hazimeh, Mazumder and Saab (arXiv:2004.06152, Mathematical Programming 2022) build the solver L0BnB on a perspective formulation and compare its relaxation with two standard alternatives. Their Proposition 1 quantifies that comparison, and their experiments (Section 4.2.1 of the paper) report speed-ups of more than 90× from using the perspective formulation with a tight bound MMM instead of the bound-free formulation.

The mission formalizes Proposition 1 together with the three steps of its proof in the paper's Appendix A.

Setting

Fix XXX, yyy, regularization parameters λ0,λ2>0\lambda_0,\lambda_2>0λ0​,λ2​>0 and a bound M>0M>0M>0 on ∥β∥∞\|\beta\|_\infty∥β∥∞​; write [p]={1,…,p}[p]=\{1,\dots,p\}[p]={1,…,p}.

The Big-M formulation B(M)B(M)B(M) introduces indicators ziz_izi​ and minimizes 12∥y−Xβ∥22+λ0∑izi+λ2∥β∥22\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\lambda_0\sum_i z_i+\lambda_2\|\beta\|_2^221​∥y−Xβ∥22​+λ0​∑i​zi​+λ2​∥β∥22​ subject to −Mzi≤βi≤Mzi-Mz_i\le\beta_i\le Mz_i−Mzi​≤βi​≤Mzi​, zi∈{0,1}z_i\in\{0,1\}zi​∈{0,1}. Its interval relaxation lets zi∈[0,1]z_i\in[0,1]zi​∈[0,1]; its optimal value is VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​.

The reverse Huber penalty is B(t)=∣t∣\mathcal B(t)=|t|B(t)=∣t∣ for ∣t∣≤1|t|\le1∣t∣≤1 and (t2+1)/2(t^2+1)/2(t2+1)/2 for ∣t∣≥1|t|\ge1∣t∣≥1. Put

ψ1(b;λ0,λ2)=2λ0 B(bλ2/λ0),ψ2(b;λ0,λ2,M)=(λ0M+λ2M)∣b∣,\psi_1(b;\lambda_0,\lambda_2)=2\lambda_0\,\mathcal B\big(b\sqrt{\lambda_2/\lambda_0}\big),\qquad \psi_2(b;\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M)=\Big(\frac{\lambda_0}{M}+\lambda_2M\Big)|b|,ψ1​(b;λ0​,λ2​)=2λ0​B(bλ2​/λ0​​),ψ2​(b;λ0​,λ2​,M)=(Mλ0​​+λ2​M)∣b∣,

and let ψ=ψ1\psi=\psi_1ψ=ψ1​ if λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M and ψ=ψ2\psi=\psi_2ψ=ψ2​ if λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M. The paper's Theorem 1 shows that the interval relaxation of the perspective formulation PR(M)\mathrm{PR}(M)PR(M) is equivalent to

min⁡∥β∥∞≤MF(β),F(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i∈[p]ψ(βi;λ0,λ2,M),(5)\min_{\|\beta\|_\infty\le M} F(\beta),\qquad F(\beta)=\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\sum_{i\in[p]}\psi(\beta_i;\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M), \tag{5}∥β∥∞​≤Mmin​F(β),F(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∈[p]∑​ψ(βi​;λ0​,λ2​,M),(5)

and VPR(M)V_{PR(M)}VPR(M)​ denotes the optimal value of (5). Without a bound, the relaxation value of PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) is

VPR(∞)=min⁡β∈RpG(β),G(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i∈[p]ψ1(βi;λ0,λ2).(6)V_{PR(\infty)}=\min_{\beta\in\mathbb R^p}G(\beta),\qquad G(\beta)=\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\sum_{i\in[p]}\psi_1(\beta_i;\lambda_0,\lambda_2). \tag{6}VPR(∞)​=β∈Rpmin​G(β),G(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+i∈[p]∑​ψ1​(βi​;λ0​,λ2​).(6)

Finally h(λ0,λ2,M)=λ0/M+λ2M−2λ0λ2h(\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M)=\lambda_0/M+\lambda_2M-2\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2}h(λ0​,λ2​,M)=λ0​/M+λ2​M−2λ0​λ2​​, and β∗\beta^*β∗ denotes an optimal solution of (5).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 1

For λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M,

VPR(M) ≥ VB(M)+λ2(M∥β∗∥1−∥β∗∥22),(7)V_{PR(M)}\ \ge\ V_{B(M)}+\lambda_2\big(M\|\beta^*\|_1-\|\beta^*\|_2^2\big), \tag{7}VPR(M)​ ≥ VB(M)​+λ2​(M∥β∗∥1​−∥β∗∥22​),(7) VPR(M) ≥ VPR(∞)+h(λ0,λ2,M) ∥β∗∥1.(8)V_{PR(M)}\ \ge\ V_{PR(\infty)}+h(\lambda_0,\lambda_2,M)\,\|\beta^*\|_1. \tag{8}VPR(M)​ ≥ VPR(∞)​+h(λ0​,λ2​,M)∥β∗∥1​.(8)

Milestones

  1. (37): VB(M)=min⁡∥β∥∞≤MH(β)V_{B(M)}=\min_{\|\beta\|_\infty\le M}H(\beta)VB(M)​=min∥β∥∞​≤M​H(β) with H(β)=12∥y−Xβ∥22+∑i(λ0M∣βi∣+λ2βi2)H(\beta)=\tfrac12\|y-X\beta\|_2^2+\sum_i\big(\tfrac{\lambda_0}{M}|\beta_i|+\lambda_2\beta_i^2\big)H(β)=21​∥y−Xβ∥22​+∑i​(Mλ0​​∣βi​∣+λ2​βi2​); the Big-M relaxation expressed in β\betaβ alone. It holds for every M>0M>0M>0.
  2. (7) alone.
  3. The linear case of ψ1\psi_1ψ1​: if ∣b∣≤M<λ0/λ2|b|\le M<\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}∣b∣≤M<λ0​/λ2​​ then ψ1(b;λ0,λ2)=2∣b∣λ0λ2\psi_1(b;\lambda_0,\lambda_2)=2|b|\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2}ψ1​(b;λ0​,λ2​)=2∣b∣λ0​λ2​​.
  4. (8) alone (the paper's (38)).

The goal is the conjunction of milestones 2 and 4.

Significance

In the regime λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M both added terms are nonnegative: M∥β∗∥1≥∥β∗∥22M\|\beta^*\|_1\ge\|\beta^*\|_2^2M∥β∗∥1​≥∥β∗∥22​ because ∥β∗∥∞≤M\|\beta^*\|_\infty\le M∥β∗∥∞​≤M, and h>0h>0h>0 because λ0/M+λ2M>2λ0λ2\lambda_0/M+\lambda_2M>2\sqrt{\lambda_0\lambda_2}λ0​/M+λ2​M>2λ0​λ2​​ whenever M≠λ0/λ2M\ne\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}M=λ0​/λ2​​. So the perspective relaxation is at least as strong as both the Big-M relaxation and PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞), strictly so as soon as one coordinate of β∗\beta^*β∗ lies strictly inside (0,M)(0,M)(0,M) in absolute value (for (7)) or β∗≠0\beta^*\ne0β∗=0 (for (8)). The bounds are explicit in the relaxation's own solution, so they can be evaluated at a BnB node. This is the theoretical justification for the paper's design choice of building its solver on PR(M)\mathrm{PR}(M)PR(M) with a valid, tight MMM; the regime λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M, where (5) is (6) with the additional box constraint ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty\le M∥β∥∞​≤M, is complementary.

Proposition 1 is proved in the paper; it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces one, together with reusable Lean definitions of the three relaxation values and of the reverse Huber penalty that other statements about perspective relaxations of sparse regression can be stated against.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of the coordinate-wise penalties is short. The substance is in comparing optimal values that are defined as infima over different feasible sets. The obvious argument "VPR(M)−VB(M)≥F(β∗)−H(β∗)V_{PR(M)}-V_{B(M)}\ge F(\beta^*)-H(\beta^*)VPR(M)​−VB(M)​≥F(β∗)−H(β∗)" requires that the Big-M relaxation, which is posed over pairs (β,z)(\beta,z)(β,z), have value at most H(β∗)H(\beta^*)H(β∗); that is the content of (37), a statement about a different feasible set in more variables. Likewise (8) needs VPR(∞)≤G(β∗)V_{PR(\infty)}\le G(\beta^*)VPR(∞)​≤G(β∗), i.e. that the infimum in (6) is a genuine lower bound of a set bounded below, and both inequalities use the regime λ0/λ2>M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}>Mλ0​/λ2​​>M, in which ψ=ψ2\psi=\psi_2ψ=ψ2​. Dropping the regime hypothesis makes (8) false in general: for λ0/λ2≤M\sqrt{\lambda_0/\lambda_2}\le Mλ0​/λ2​​≤M one has ψ=ψ1\psi=\psi_1ψ=ψ1​ and h≥0h\ge0h≥0, and the right side can exceed VPR(M)=VPR(∞)V_{PR(M)}=V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(M)​=VPR(∞)​.

Formalization scope

All objects live in the namespace L0BnB.Strength. Data are X : Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ, y : Fin n → ℝ, reals lam0 lam2 M with 0 < lam0, 0 < lam2, 0 < M as hypotheses; [p][p][p] is Fin p. Norms are explicit sums: ∥v∥22\|v\|_2^2∥v∥22​ is ∑ i, v i ^ 2, ∥β∥1\|\beta\|_1∥β∥1​ is ∑ i, |β i|, and ∥β∥∞≤M\|\beta\|_\infty\le M∥β∥∞​≤M is ∀ i, |β i| ≤ M. The regime is written M < Real.sqrt (lam0 / lam2).

Optimal values are sInf of the image of the feasible set in ℝ. Each set is nonempty (β=0\beta=0β=0, z=0z=0z=0) and bounded below by 000 under the positivity hypotheses, so sInf is the true infimum and never a junk value. VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​ is defined over pairs (β,z)(\beta,z)(β,z) with zi∈[0,1]z_i\in[0,1]zi​∈[0,1], not through HHH; (37) is a theorem. VPR(∞)V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(∞)​ is (6) as printed: the paper attributes to its reference [21] the identification of (6) with the interval relaxation of PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞) in (β,z,s)(\beta,z,s)(β,z,s) variables, and that identification is not part of the mission. VPR(M)V_{PR(M)}VPR(M)​ is the value of (5), which is the paper's definition; Theorem 1 (the equivalence of (5) with the (β,z,s)(\beta,z,s)(β,z,s) relaxation) belongs to a sibling mission.

The optimal solution β∗\beta^*β∗ is a binder with the hypotheses ∥β∗∥∞≤M\|\beta^*\|_\infty\le M∥β∗∥∞​≤M and F(β∗)≤F(β)F(\beta^*)\le F(\beta)F(β∗)≤F(β) for every β\betaβ in the box. A formalization in which β∗\beta^*β∗ is an arbitrary feasible point, or in which VB(M)V_{B(M)}VB(M)​ or VPR(∞)V_{PR(\infty)}VPR(∞)​ is defined through a chosen minimizer, would change the statement and is ruled out. The paper uses no O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) in this result, so no constant is instantiated.

Needed infrastructure is light: continuity of HHH and compactness of the box for the attainment in (37), and csInf lemmas on ℝ. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of the attainment of the infimum in (5), are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, A. Saab, Sparse Regression at Scale: Branch-and-Bound rooted in First-Order Optimization, arXiv:2004.06152v2, 2021; Mathematical Programming (2022). https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.06152
  • H. Hazimeh, R. Mazumder, Fast Best Subset Selection: Coordinate Descent and Local Combinatorial Optimization Algorithms, Operations Research 68(5), 1517–1537, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2019.1919
  • H. Dong, K. Chen, J. Linderoth, Regularization vs. Relaxation: A conic optimization perspective of statistical variable selection, arXiv e-prints, 2015 (the paper's reference [21], source of (6) for PR(∞)\mathrm{PR}(\infty)PR(∞)). https://arxiv.org/abs/1510.06083
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Proximal Algorithms II: The Proximal Operator of a Norm Is v − λΠ_B(v/λ), B the Unit Ball of the Dual NormResearch Paper

Motivation

Norms are the most common nonsmooth terms in convex optimization models. The ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ norm promotes sparsity in the lasso and in compressed sensing, the Euclidean norm of blocks of variables promotes group sparsity in the group lasso, and the nuclear norm promotes low rank. First-order methods for such models, notably the proximal gradient method, ADMM and their accelerated and parallel variants, handle a norm term through a single operation: its proximal operator. Each iteration of these methods needs prox⁡λ∥⋅∥(v)\operatorname{prox}_{\lambda\|\cdot\|}(v)proxλ∥⋅∥​(v) for some point vvv and step λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, so a description of this operator for an arbitrary norm is needed in practice.

The monograph of N. Parikh and S. Boyd, Proximal Algorithms (Found. Trends Optim. 1(3), 2014), records this description twice. In §2.5 it derives it from Moreau decomposition, and in §6.5 it states the general scaled form: the proximal operator of a norm is the identity minus a scaled Euclidean projection onto the unit ball of the dual norm. The underlying decomposition is due to J.-J. Moreau (Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bull. SMF 93, 1965). The norm case is standard in convex analysis texts; Parikh and Boyd present it as the bridge between proximal operators of norms and projections onto norm balls.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean inner product zTxz^TxzTx and Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​.

A function f:Rn→R∪{+∞}f:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}f:Rn→R∪{+∞} is closed proper convex if its epigraph {(x,t)∣f(x)≤t}\{(x,t)\mid f(x)\le t\}{(x,t)∣f(x)≤t} is a nonempty closed convex set. For such fff and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, the proximal operator is

prox⁡λf(v)=argmin⁡x(f(x)+12λ∥x−v∥22),\operatorname{prox}_{\lambda f}(v)=\operatorname*{argmin}_x\Big(f(x)+\tfrac{1}{2\lambda}\|x-v\|_2^2\Big),proxλf​(v)=xargmin​(f(x)+2λ1​∥x−v∥22​),

which has a unique minimizer for every vvv. The convex conjugate is f∗(y)=sup⁡x(yTx−f(x))f^*(y)=\sup_x\big(y^Tx-f(x)\big)f∗(y)=supx​(yTx−f(x)). For a set CCC, the indicator function ICI_CIC​ is 000 on CCC and +∞+\infty+∞ off CCC, and the Euclidean projection onto a nonempty closed convex CCC is ΠC(v)=argmin⁡x∈C∥x−v∥2\Pi_C(v)=\operatorname{argmin}_{x\in C}\|x-v\|_2ΠC​(v)=argminx∈C​∥x−v∥2​.

Let ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ be a general norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, possibly different from ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​. Its dual norm and the dual unit ball are

∥z∥∗=sup⁡{zTx∣∥x∥≤1},B={x∣∥x∥∗≤1}.\|z\|_*=\sup\{z^Tx\mid \|x\|\le 1\},\qquad \mathcal B=\{x\mid \|x\|_*\le 1\}.∥z∥∗​=sup{zTx∣∥x∥≤1},B={x∣∥x∥∗​≤1}.

In the Lean development the space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), the general norm is a seminorm N with the definiteness hypothesis IsNorm N, ∥z∥∗\|z\|_*∥z∥∗​ is dualNorm N z, B\mathcal BB is dualBall N, ICI_CIC​ is indicator C, and f=∥⋅∥f=\|\cdot\|f=∥⋅∥ is normFun N.

Formalization targets

Goal: (6.8), §6.5, p. 187

For every general norm f=∥⋅∥f=\|\cdot\|f=∥⋅∥ on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, every λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and every v∈Rnv\in\mathbb R^nv∈Rn,

prox⁡λf(v)=v−λ ΠB(v/λ).\operatorname{prox}_{\lambda f}(v)=v-\lambda\,\Pi_{\mathcal B}(v/\lambda).proxλf​(v)=v−λΠB​(v/λ).

Stated as: v−λw=prox⁡λf(v)v-\lambda w=\operatorname{prox}_{\lambda f}(v)v−λw=proxλf​(v) if and only if w=ΠB(v/λ)w=\Pi_{\mathcal B}(v/\lambda)w=ΠB​(v/λ), for all v,wv,wv,w.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Moreau decomposition (2.4), p. 133: v=prox⁡f(v)+prox⁡f∗(v)v=\operatorname{prox}_f(v)+\operatorname{prox}_{f^*}(v)v=proxf​(v)+proxf∗​(v) for closed proper convex fff. This is the published, proved theorem MoreauProx.Decomposition.moreau_decomposition.
  2. §2.5, p. 134: for a norm, f∗=IBf^*=I_{\mathcal B}f∗=IB​ as functions on all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn.
  3. §2.5, p. 134: the case λ=1\lambda=1λ=1, v=prox⁡f(v)+ΠB(v)v=\operatorname{prox}_f(v)+\Pi_{\mathcal B}(v)v=proxf​(v)+ΠB​(v).
  4. (6.7), p. 187: prox⁡λf(v)=v−λprox⁡f∗/λ(v/λ)\operatorname{prox}_{\lambda f}(v)=v-\lambda\operatorname{prox}_{f^*/\lambda}(v/\lambda)proxλf​(v)=v−λproxf∗/λ​(v/λ) for a general norm fff and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, as printed.

Significance

The goal reduces evaluating the proximal operator of any norm to projecting onto one convex set, the unit ball of the dual norm. All the familiar closed forms are instances: soft thresholding for ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ (whose dual ball is the ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ box), block soft thresholding for ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ (whose dual ball is the Euclidean ball), and the ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ prox via projection onto the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ ball. Conversely, it lets a projection onto a norm ball be computed from the norm's proximal operator. Milestone 4, the scaled Moreau decomposition, is here stated for norms; its general form is an identity used throughout splitting methods whenever a dual or conjugate prox is cheaper than the primal one.

The results are classical and proved in the literature; the work here is formalization. Moreau's decomposition is already formalized on the platform (Moreau 1965 series, proved). Several norm-specific corollaries are posed as open problems in other series: soft thresholding (BoydADMM.Prox.prox_l1_eq_softThreshold), block soft thresholding (BoydADMM.L1.group_lasso_z_update) and projection onto a Euclidean ball (Pegasos.Analysis.projBall_isProj). A proof of the goal here gives a uniform route to such statements for any norm. The general-norm statements, the conjugate of a norm and the scaled decomposition are not formalized elsewhere on the platform.

Difficulty

The derivation in the monograph is two lines, but each line hides a step. Computing f∗f^*f∗ for a norm requires the inequality yTx≤∥x∥ ∥y∥∗y^Tx\le\|x\|\,\|y\|_*yTx≤∥x∥∥y∥∗​ and, for ∥y∥∗>1\|y\|_*>1∥y∥∗​>1, a direction along which yTx−∥x∥y^Tx-\|x\|yTx−∥x∥ grows without bound; the dual norm is a supremum, so finiteness and attainment have to be argued from finite dimensionality and definiteness of the norm. The scaling step requires knowing how the conjugate and the proximal operator transform under f↦λff\mapsto\lambda ff↦λf and v↦v/λv\mapsto v/\lambdav↦v/λ, in extended-real arithmetic where +∞+\infty+∞ values must be tracked. The proximal operator of an indicator being the projection is an unfolding of definitions, but the minimizer predicates on both sides must be matched, including the factor 12\tfrac1221​ and squared versus unsquared distances.

A tempting shortcut is to work only with the Euclidean norm, where B\mathcal BB is the Euclidean unit ball; that proves a special case, not the goal.

Formalization scope

  • Space and norms. Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) for arbitrary nnn, including n=0n=0n=0. The general norm is an arbitrary Seminorm ℝ (EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n)) with definiteness (IsNorm); the Euclidean norm of the space is used only in the proximal objective and the projection, as in (1.1) and (1.3).
  • Extended values. Functions Rn→R∪{+∞}\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}Rn→R∪{+∞} take values in EReal. The dual norm is computed in EReal as the supremum of the printed set, so it has no junk value. λf\lambda fλf and f∗/λf^*/\lambdaf∗/λ are products with the positive reals λ\lambdaλ, λ−1\lambda^{-1}λ−1, and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 is a hypothesis everywhere (p. 124).
  • Proximal operator and projection as predicates. "x=prox⁡g(z)x=\operatorname{prox}_g(z)x=proxg​(z)" is IsProx g z x (xxx minimizes 12∥u−z∥22+g(u)\tfrac12\|u-z\|_2^2+g(u)21​∥u−z∥22​+g(u)) and "x=ΠC(z)x=\Pi_C(z)x=ΠC​(z)" is IsProj C z x. With g=λfg=\lambda fg=λf, Moreau's objective 12∥u−z∥22+λf(u)\tfrac12\|u-z\|_2^2+\lambda f(u)21​∥u−z∥22​+λf(u) is λ\lambdaλ times the objective of (1.2), so it has the same minimizers. Both minimizers exist and are unique, so an equivalence over all candidate points states the printed equations exactly.
  • Standing assumption. Every function whose proximal operator appears is closed proper convex (p. 124); a norm is, so no statement needs an extra hypothesis. Every statement, milestone 4 included, is about a general norm, as on the page.
  • Ruling out trivializations. The dual unit ball is defined through the printed supremum sup⁡{zTx∣∥x∥≤1}\sup\{z^Tx\mid\|x\|\le1\}sup{zTx∣∥x∥≤1}, never by a closed form or as "the set that makes (6.8) hold", and the projection is not pre-solved.
  • Imported objects. The conjugate conj, IsProx and IsProj come from the published Moreau 1965 series definitions MoreauProx.Decomposition.ConvexDuality and MoreauProx.Decomposition.Cones.
  • Source. The PDF used is the authors' copy of the published monograph in the journal's format (printed pages 123–231); page numbers are those of this copy.

Useful contributions include lemmas on conjugates of positively homogeneous functions, on the behaviour of IsProx under scaling, and the identity prox⁡IC=ΠC\operatorname{prox}_{I_C}=\Pi_CproxIC​​=ΠC​ in the predicate form; all are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • N. Parikh and S. Boyd, Proximal Algorithms, Foundations and Trends in Optimization 1(3), 2014. https://doi.org/10.1561/2400000003
  • J.-J. Moreau, Proximité et dualité dans un espace hilbertien, Bulletin de la Société Mathématique de France 93:273–299, 1965. https://doi.org/10.24033/bsmf.1625
  • H. H. Bauschke and P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato and J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1), 2011. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Revisiting Frank-Wolfe: Projection-Free Sparse Convex Optimization 2: For f = ‖x‖², Every k-Sparse Point of the Simplex Has Duality Gap ≥ 2/kResearch Paper

Why sparsity limits accuracy

The Frank–Wolfe algorithm minimizes a smooth convex objective over a compact convex domain by choosing an atom through a linear optimization problem and moving toward it. On a domain that is the convex hull of atoms, each ordinary iteration introduces at most one new atom. That makes the method useful when a solution represented with few atoms is valuable, but it raises a basic question: how much accuracy can a solution with only a few atoms attain? Jaggi's 2013 analysis gives upper bounds on primal error and duality gap for four Frank–Wolfe variants. Its sparsity section supplies a matching obstruction on the unit simplex. This mission isolates that obstruction so the claimed dependence on sparsity can be checked independently of any particular implementation of the algorithm.

The paper calls the number of used atoms the sparsity of an iterate. It proves two lower bounds for one quadratic objective: a sparse point cannot have arbitrarily small objective value, and, with fewer active coordinates than the simplex dimension, it cannot have arbitrarily small duality gap. These are worst-case statements about feasible points themselves. Consequently, any method whose iterates retain the stated sparsity is subject to them, regardless of how it selects its next atom. The source statements and constants are Lemma 3 and Lemma 4, PDF p. 5.

The quadratic simplex problem

Let nnn be a positive integer and let the unit simplex be

Δn={x∈Rn:xi≥0 for every i, ∑i=1nxi=1}.\Delta_n=\left\{x\in\mathbb R^n:x_i\ge0\text{ for every }i,\ \sum_{i=1}^n x_i=1\right\}.Δn​={x∈Rn:xi​≥0 for every i, i=1∑n​xi​=1}.

For a vector xxx, let card⁡(x)\operatorname{card}(x)card(x) be the number of nonzero coordinates. The objective is the squared Euclidean norm f(x)=∥x∥22=∑ixi2f(x)=\|x\|_2^2=\sum_i x_i^2f(x)=∥x∥22​=∑i​xi2​. Its minimum on the full simplex is 1/n1/n1/n, reached at the uniform point. The paper compares that optimum with the best value permitted by a bound on card⁡(x)\operatorname{card}(x)card(x). The dimension nnn and sparsity budget kkk are separate: the goal assumes k<nk<nk<n, so at least one coordinate must be zero at every eligible point.

The duality gap at a feasible xxx is

gf,Δn(x)=max⁡s∈Δn⟨x−s,∇f(x)⟩.g_{f,\Delta_n}(x)=\max_{s\in\Delta_n}\langle x-s,\nabla f(x)\rangle.gf,Δn​​(x)=s∈Δn​max​⟨x−s,∇f(x)⟩.

For a convex objective, this gap bounds the difference between the current objective value and the optimum; the paper introduces that certificate in display (2), PDF p. 2. Here the maximum exists because the simplex is nonempty and compact and the expression is continuous in sss. It is the same certificate computed by minimizing a linear function over the domain in a Frank–Wolfe step. The paper's Table 1, PDF p. 6 identifies the simplex linear subproblem with choosing a coordinate having the largest coefficient.

Formalization targets

Sparse objective minimum

For 1≤k≤n1\le k\le n1≤k≤n, Lemma 3 asserts an attained minimum:

min⁡x∈Δn, card⁡(x)≤kf(x)=1k.\min_{x\in\Delta_n,\ \operatorname{card}(x)\le k} f(x)=\frac1k.x∈Δn​, card(x)≤kmin​f(x)=k1​.

The associated primal-error statement says that a point with exactly kkk nonzero coordinates has f(x)−f(x∗)≥1/k−1/nf(x)-f(x^*)\ge1/k-1/nf(x)−f(x∗)≥1/k−1/n, where x∗x^*x∗ is an optimizer on the full simplex. The minimum and the primal-error reading are both included as draft theorems.

Duality-gap lower bound

For every natural number k<nk<nk<n, Lemma 4 states the mission goal:

∀x∈Δn,card⁡(x)≤k ⟹ gf,Δn(x)≥2k.\forall x\in\Delta_n,\quad \operatorname{card}(x)\le k\ \Longrightarrow\ g_{f,\Delta_n}(x)\ge\frac2k.∀x∈Δn​,card(x)≤k ⟹ gf,Δn​​(x)≥k2​.

The threshold k<nk<nk<n is essential to this exact value. If all coordinates may be active, the uniform optimizer has zero gap. The case k=0k=0k=0 is formally allowed by the paper's natural-number wording, but has no eligible simplex point. The formal statement keeps the paper's quantifier order and does not add a positive-kkk hypothesis.

Three milestones accompany the goal. The first records that an atomic set and its convex hull have the same support function. The second records the simplex support value max⁡iyi\max_i y_imaxi​yi​ from Table 1. The third is Lemma 3's attained sparse minimum. They are stated as mathematical claims independent of any algorithmic running-time assertion.

What the bound establishes

The source's convergence analysis gives error guarantees that decrease with the number of iterations, while its simplex example shows that using only kkk atoms leaves primal error at least 1/k−1/n1/k-1/n1/k−1/n and, for k<nk<nk<n, gap at least 2/k2/k2/k. Together they delimit what the paper's sparsity guarantees can achieve. The duality-gap claim concerns a certificate of approximation quality, so it applies even when the optimal value is unavailable to an algorithm. The result is already proved in the 2013 paper; the open work here is its Lean formalization and the finite-dimensional facts needed to connect sparse coordinates, linear optimization, and the gap.

The formalization also produces reusable interfaces for sparse simplex optimization: a coordinate-count notion of sparsity, an attained minimum formulation, and a support-function statement that avoids making a real supremum silently return a default value on an empty or unbounded set. These can serve later work on atomic methods without tying that work to one choice of Frank–Wolfe steps.

Where the argument is delicate

Bounding the quadratic objective alone does not establish the duality-gap statement. The gap also involves the best linear comparison point sss in the simplex. The unrestricted simplex optimum, the optimum under a sparsity budget, and the best linear comparison are different objects and must retain their respective domains. An encoding that replaces the gap's domain with the sparse feasible set would change the theorem. Another easy mistake is to use the ambient norm of a function Fin(n)→R\mathrm{Fin}(n)\to\mathbb RFin(n)→R as the objective: that norm is the supremum norm, whereas the paper uses the Euclidean squared norm.

The paper's displayed curvature value Cf=4C_f=4Cf​=4 is included as a companion statement. It uses the Euclidean diameter of the simplex, which is 2\sqrt22​ for n≥2n\ge2n≥2. The one-dimensional simplex is a single point, so extending that equality to n=1n=1n=1 would be false. The formalized companion makes the dimension condition explicit.

Formalization scope

Vectors are functions Fin(n)→R\mathrm{Fin}(n)\to\mathbb RFin(n)→R. The domain is Mathlib's stdSimplex R (Fin(n))\mathrm{stdSimplex}\ \mathbb R\ (\mathrm{Fin}(n))stdSimplex R (Fin(n)); the objective is an explicit sum of coordinate squares, and sparsity counts nonzero coordinates. The gradient pairing in the source is represented by the Fréchet derivative applied to a direction. For this quadratic, the two agree coordinate by coordinate. The duality gap is a real supremum of those derivative values over the simplex. Its use in the goal is guarded by k<nk<nk<n, which implies n>0n>0n>0 and makes the simplex nonempty; compactness makes the supremum a maximum. The support-function milestone states equality through all upper bounds, so it also has a meaningful reading for empty or unbounded atomic sets.

The curvature set follows display (3), PDF p. 3, with step size 0<γ≤10<\gamma\le10<γ≤1 because the printed quotient has no value at zero. The Cf=4C_f=4Cf​=4 companion assumes n≥2n\ge2n≥2, a necessary dimension pin beyond the paper's sentence. Other standing conditions of the general problem are discharged by the chosen quadratic and simplex, rather than added as free hypotheses. No theorem assumes the quadratic minimum, a gap maximizer, or a zero coordinate as a premise; those are consequences to be established from feasibility and sparsity. The source PDF contains the statements but not its cited appendix proofs, so formal proof contributions may use other valid arguments. The simplex support, sparse minimum, and curvature interfaces are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • Martin Jaggi, Revisiting Frank-Wolfe: Projection-Free Sparse Convex Optimization, Proceedings of the 30th International Conference on Machine Learning, JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings 28, 2013. Proceedings page.
5 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraNumerical AnalysisOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

A Primal-Dual Interior-Point Algorithm for Nonsymmetric Exponential-Cone Optimization 2: Rank-One Recursions Factor Y₀(Y₀ᵀS₀)⁻¹Y₀ᵀ = VVᵀ and S₀(Y₀ᵀS₀)⁻¹S₀ᵀ = UUᵀResearch Paper

Motivation

Quasi-Newton methods replace the Hessian of an objective by a matrix H≻0H \succ 0H≻0 that is updated from observed pairs of steps and gradient changes. The secant equation HS=YHS = YHS=Y asks the new matrix to map the observed steps SSS to the observed changes YYY. The best-known update is BFGS, which for ppp simultaneous pairs S,Y∈Rn×pS, Y \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}S,Y∈Rn×p reads

HBFGS:=Y(YTS)−1YT+H−HS(STHS)−1STH.H_{\mathrm{BFGS}} := Y(Y^TS)^{-1}Y^T + H - HS(S^THS)^{-1}S^TH .HBFGS​:=Y(YTS)−1YT+H−HS(STHS)−1STH.

Schnabel (Quasi-Newton methods using multiple secant equations, technical report, University of Colorado at Boulder, 1983, reference [25] of the paper) studied such multiple-secant updates; one of his results is that a positive definite HHH with HS=YHS = YHS=Y exists exactly when YTS≻0Y^TS \succ 0YTS≻0.

Dahl and Andersen (Math. Program. 194:341–370, 2022) use multiple-secant BFGS updates to build primal-dual scaling matrices for an interior-point algorithm on the nonsymmetric exponential cone, following Tunçel (Found. Comput. Math. 1:229–254, 2001) and Myklebust and Tunçel (arXiv:1411.2129). In their setting p=2p = 2p=2, and they need the update in factored, low-rank form. Their Theorem 2 supplies it: the term Y(YTS)−1YTY(Y^TS)^{-1}Y^TY(YTS)−1YT, and its counterpart S(YTS)−1STS(Y^TS)^{-1}S^TS(YTS)−1ST for the inverse update, are computed by ppp rank-one steps. These steps resemble single-secant quasi-Newton updates, and no inverse is formed. This mission formalizes Theorem 2 and the steps of its proof.

Setting

Let n,p≥0n, p \ge 0n,p≥0 and Y0,S0∈Rn×pY_0, S_0 \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}Y0​,S0​∈Rn×p. Write eke_kek​ for the kkk-th unit vector of Rp\mathbb{R}^pRp and ⟨a,b⟩=aTb\langle a, b\rangle = a^Tb⟨a,b⟩=aTb for the inner product of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, so that ⟨Yek,Sek⟩=(YTS)kk\langle Ye_k, Se_k\rangle = (Y^TS)_{kk}⟨Yek​,Sek​⟩=(YTS)kk​. The hypothesis of the theorem is

Y0TS0≻0,Y_0^TS_0 \succ 0,Y0T​S0​≻0,

meaning that the p×pp\times pp×p matrix Y0TS0Y_0^TS_0Y0T​S0​ is symmetric and positive definite.

For k=1,…,pk = 1, \dots, pk=1,…,p the recursions (25)–(26) are

vk:=Yk−1ek⟨Yk−1ek,Sk−1ek⟩1/2,Yk:=Yk−1−vkvkTSk−1,v_k := \frac{Y_{k-1}e_k}{\langle Y_{k-1}e_k, S_{k-1}e_k\rangle^{1/2}}, \qquad Y_k := Y_{k-1} - v_kv_k^TS_{k-1},vk​:=⟨Yk−1​ek​,Sk−1​ek​⟩1/2Yk−1​ek​​,Yk​:=Yk−1​−vk​vkT​Sk−1​, uk:=Sk−1ek⟨Yk−1ek,Sk−1ek⟩1/2,Sk:=Sk−1−ukukTYk−1.u_k := \frac{S_{k-1}e_k}{\langle Y_{k-1}e_k, S_{k-1}e_k\rangle^{1/2}}, \qquad S_k := S_{k-1} - u_ku_k^TY_{k-1}.uk​:=⟨Yk−1​ek​,Sk−1​ek​⟩1/2Sk−1​ek​​,Sk​:=Sk−1​−uk​ukT​Yk−1​.

Both updates of step kkk use the previous pair (Yk−1,Sk−1)(Y_{k-1}, S_{k-1})(Yk−1​,Sk−1​). Collect the vectors into V:=(v1⋯vp)V := (v_1 \cdots v_p)V:=(v1​⋯vp​) and U:=(u1⋯up)∈Rn×pU := (u_1 \cdots u_p) \in \mathbb{R}^{n\times p}U:=(u1​⋯up​)∈Rn×p.

The proof uses two more objects. The first is the p×pp\times pp×p matrix

L:=(Y0TS0e1⟨Y0e1,S0e1⟩1/2,⋯ ,Yp−1TSp−1ep⟨Yp−1ep,Sp−1ep⟩1/2).L := \left(\frac{Y_0^TS_0e_1}{\langle Y_0e_1, S_0e_1\rangle^{1/2}}, \cdots, \frac{Y_{p-1}^TS_{p-1}e_p}{\langle Y_{p-1}e_p, S_{p-1}e_p\rangle^{1/2}}\right).L:=(⟨Y0​e1​,S0​e1​⟩1/2Y0T​S0​e1​​,⋯,⟨Yp−1​ep​,Sp−1​ep​⟩1/2Yp−1T​Sp−1​ep​​).

The second is Ψk\Psi_kΨk​, the principal submatrix formed by the last p−kp-kp−k rows and columns of YkTSkY_k^TS_kYkT​Sk​. In Lean these are ExpConeIPM.Secant.Ys, Ss, d, V, U, L and Ψ, all in one definition item.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (pp. 357–358)

Y0(Y0TS0)−1Y0T=VVT,S0(Y0TS0)−1S0T=UUT.Y_0(Y_0^TS_0)^{-1}Y_0^T = VV^T, \qquad S_0(Y_0^TS_0)^{-1}S_0^T = UU^T .Y0​(Y0T​S0​)−1Y0T​=VVT,S0​(Y0T​S0​)−1S0T​=UUT.

Milestones (the steps of the proof, pp. 358–359)

  1. (27). For k=1,…,pk = 1, \dots, pk=1,…,p,
YkTSk=Yk−1TSk−1−(Yk−1TSk−1ek)(Yk−1TSk−1ek)T⟨Yk−1ek,Sk−1ek⟩.Y_k^TS_k = Y_{k-1}^TS_{k-1} - \frac{(Y_{k-1}^TS_{k-1}e_k)(Y_{k-1}^TS_{k-1}e_k)^T}{\langle Y_{k-1}e_k, S_{k-1}e_k\rangle}.YkT​Sk​=Yk−1T​Sk−1​−⟨Yk−1​ek​,Sk−1​ek​⟩(Yk−1T​Sk−1​ek​)(Yk−1T​Sk−1​ek​)T​.
  1. Well-definedness. For k=0,…,p−1k = 0, \dots, p-1k=0,…,p−1, Ψk≻0\Psi_k \succ 0Ψk​≻0, and in particular ⟨Ykek+1,Skek+1⟩>0\langle Y_ke_{k+1}, S_ke_{k+1}\rangle > 0⟨Yk​ek+1​,Sk​ek+1​⟩>0.
  2. Sparsity. Yjek=Sjek=0Y_je_k = S_je_k = 0Yj​ek​=Sj​ek​=0 for 1≤k≤j≤p1 \le k \le j \le p1≤k≤j≤p.
  3. Cholesky factorization (28). LLT=Y0TS0LL^T = Y_0^TS_0LLT=Y0T​S0​.
  4. The VVV-identity. LVT=Y0TLV^T = Y_0^TLVT=Y0T​.

The first identity of the goal follows from milestones 4 and 5. The paper says the second "follows similarly". The analogous identity LUT=S0TLU^T = S_0^TLUT=S0T​ is not displayed in the paper, so it is not a milestone.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 expresses the multiple-secant part of the BFGS update (23), and of its inverse, as a sum of ppp rank-one terms vkvkTv_kv_k^Tvk​vkT​ and ukukTu_ku_k^Tuk​ukT​. Each term comes from a recursion that touches one column at a time. On pp. 359–360 Dahl and Andersen apply it twice with p=2p = 2p=2. This gives the BFGS scaling of their exponential-cone algorithm as an explicit rank-3 update of μF′′(x)\mu F''(x)μF′′(x), which is how the algorithm implemented in MOSEK computes its scaling matrices (§6, p. 361 of the paper). The argument is a Cholesky factorization of Y0TS0Y_0^TS_0Y0T​S0​ carried out implicitly on the factors Y0Y_0Y0​ and S0S_0S0​.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper, in under a page. Its proof leaves two steps implicit. The first is that the symmetry of every YkTSkY_k^TS_kYkT​Sk​, which (27) and the step to LVT=Y0TLV^T = Y_0^TLVT=Y0T​ use, propagates from Y0TS0Y_0^TS_0Y0T​S0​. The second is the second identity, which the paper does not prove. A machine-checked proof records both. To our knowledge no proof assistant has a formal treatment of multiple-secant updates. The recursion also gives a reusable statement: a column-by-column Schur-complement process on a product YTSY^TSYTS produces its Cholesky factor.

Difficulty

The obvious route expands VVTVV^TVVT directly and compares it with Y0(Y0TS0)−1Y0TY_0(Y_0^TS_0)^{-1}Y_0^TY0​(Y0T​S0​)−1Y0T​. This leads nowhere, because vkv_kvk​ depends on all earlier steps through Yk−1Y_{k-1}Yk−1​ and Sk−1S_{k-1}Sk−1​. The step that carries the proof is an invariant over the recursion. The trailing blocks Ψk\Psi_kΨk​ of YkTSkY_k^TS_kYkT​Sk​ must stay symmetric positive definite, and the leading columns of YkY_kYk​ and SkS_kSk​ must stay zero. Both must be maintained together through a pair of coupled updates, in which SkS_kSk​ is updated with the old Yk−1Y_{k-1}Yk−1​. A second difficulty is bookkeeping: the paper's 1-based columns, the step count kkk, and the trailing block of size p−kp-kp−k shift relative to each other.

The hypothesis needs care. If Y0TS0Y_0^TS_0Y0T​S0​ is only assumed to satisfy xTY0TS0x>0x^TY_0^TS_0x > 0xTY0T​S0​x>0 for x≠0x \ne 0x=0, without symmetry, the identities are false in general. A 5×35\times 35×3 instance whose symmetric part is positive definite, with a small antisymmetric part, violates the first identity by 0.440.440.44 in the largest entry.

Formalization scope

Everything is real matrix algebra over Matrix (Fin n) (Fin p) ℝ, with arbitrary n,pn, pn,p (including p=0p = 0p=0, where both sides are zero). The formalization commits to the following conventions.

  • Y0TS0≻0Y_0^TS_0 \succ 0Y0T​S0​≻0 is Matrix.PosDef, which includes symmetry. The inverse is Matrix.inv. It is a genuine inverse under this hypothesis.
  • Columns are 0-based. Column j : Fin p is the paper's ej+1e_{j+1}ej+1​. Ys Y₀ S₀ k and Ss Y₀ S₀ k are YkY_kYk​ and SkS_kSk​ after kkk steps, and they are left unchanged after step ppp. d Y₀ S₀ j is ⟨Yjej+1,Sjej+1⟩\langle Y_je_{j+1}, S_je_{j+1}\rangle⟨Yj​ej+1​,Sj​ej+1​⟩.
  • The square root is Real.sqrt. The division by it is multiplication by an inverse. Both return junk values on non-positive arguments, which never occur under the hypothesis; milestone 2 states this.
  • VVV, UUU and LLL are computed from the recursion (25)–(26). They are never chosen as some factorization satisfying the conclusion. The trivializing formalization, which defines VVV as any factor of Y0(Y0TS0)−1Y0TY_0(Y_0^TS_0)^{-1}Y_0^TY0​(Y0T​S0​)−1Y0T​, is ruled out by construction.
  • Each milestone carries the theorem's hypothesis Y0TS0≻0Y_0^TS_0 \succ 0Y0T​S0​≻0. No hypothesis on the intermediate YkTSkY_k^TS_kYkT​Sk​ is assumed, since its symmetry is part of what must be proved.

No repair of the printed statements was needed. On p. 359 two misprints are not copied: ⟨Yp−1Tep,Sp−1ep⟩\langle Y_{p-1}^Te_p, S_{p-1}e_p\rangle⟨Yp−1T​ep​,Sp−1​ep​⟩ for ⟨Yp−1ep,Sp−1ep⟩\langle Y_{p-1}e_p, S_{p-1}e_p\rangle⟨Yp−1​ep​,Sp−1​ep​⟩, and SiTYiS_i^TY_iSiT​Yi​ for YiTSiY_i^TS_iYiT​Si​. The definition of LLL uses YiTSiY_i^TS_iYiT​Si​.

A complete development needs rank-one updates of products, Schur complements of a positive definite matrix in its leading entry, and inverses of LLTLL^TLLT for an invertible LLL. Schnabel's existence theorem (Theorem 1 of the paper) and the applications on pp. 359–360 are outside the mission. A general lemma on Schur-complement recursions producing Cholesky factors would be reusable on its own. Contributions on the U-side identity LUT=S0TLU^T = S_0^TLUT=S0T​ are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Dahl, E. D. Andersen, A primal-dual interior-point algorithm for nonsymmetric exponential-cone optimization, Math. Program. 194:341–370, 2022. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-021-01631-4
  • R. B. Schnabel, Quasi-Newton methods using multiple secant equations, Technical Report, University of Colorado at Boulder, 1983 (no stable online link known; cited as [25] in Dahl–Andersen).
  • L. Tunçel, Generalization of primal-dual interior-point methods to convex optimization problems in conic form, Found. Comput. Math. 1:229–254, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1007/s102080010008
  • T. Myklebust, L. Tunçel, Interior-point algorithms for convex optimization based on primal-dual metrics, arXiv:1411.2129, 2014. https://arxiv.org/abs/1411.2129
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimization of Convex Risk Functions 2: On a Banach Lattice, a Proper Convex Monotone Risk Function Is Continuous and Subdifferentiable on the Interior of Its DomainResearch Paper

Motivation

Risk-averse stochastic optimization replaces the expected cost E[X]\mathbb E[X]E[X] of an uncertain outcome XXX by a risk function ρ(X)\rho(X)ρ(X): conditional value-at-risk, mean–semideviation and mean–upper-semideviation models, and the coherent and convex risk measures of Artzner, Delbaen, Eber and Heath and of Föllmer and Schied. Ruszczyński and Shapiro, Optimization of convex risk functions (Math. Oper. Res. 31, 2006), develop the convex analysis of such functions on general spaces of random variables, so that they can be used inside optimization problems min⁡z∈Sρ(F(z))\min_{z\in S}\rho(F(z))minz∈S​ρ(F(z)).

Optimality conditions, duality and sensitivity analysis for such problems need two regularity properties of ρ\rhoρ: continuity, and the existence of subgradients that are continuous linear functionals. For extended-valued convex functions on infinite-dimensional spaces neither comes for free. The standard sufficient condition, boundedness from above on a neighbourhood of a point (Ioffe and Tikhomirov), often cannot be used: the paper notes (p. 436) that the cone of nonnegative functions in Lp(Rm,B,μ)\mathcal L_p(\mathbb R^m,\mathcal B,\mu)Lp​(Rm,B,μ), p∈[1,+∞)p\in[1,+\infty)p∈[1,+∞), μ\muμ a continuous probability measure, has empty interior. Section 3.1 shows instead that for monotone convex risk functions on a Banach lattice both properties follow from convexity and monotonicity alone. This mission formalizes that result, Proposition 3.1, and its Lp\mathcal L_pLp​ instance, Corollary 3.1.

Setting

Let X\mathcal XX be a real vector space with a partial order ⪰\succeq⪰, and R‾=[−∞,+∞]\overline{\mathbb R}=[-\infty,+\infty]R=[−∞,+∞]. Outcomes are costs: smaller is better. A function ρ:X→R‾\rho:\mathcal X\to\overline{\mathbb R}ρ:X→R has domain dom⁡ρ={X:ρ(X)<+∞}\operatorname{dom}\rho=\{X:\rho(X)<+\infty\}domρ={X:ρ(X)<+∞} and is proper if ρ(X)>−∞\rho(X)>-\inftyρ(X)>−∞ for all XXX and dom⁡ρ≠∅\operatorname{dom}\rho\neq\emptysetdomρ=∅. The paper's axioms used here are

  • (A1) convexity: ρ(αX+(1−α)Y)≤αρ(X)+(1−α)ρ(Y)\rho(\alpha X+(1-\alpha)Y)\le\alpha\rho(X)+(1-\alpha)\rho(Y)ρ(αX+(1−α)Y)≤αρ(X)+(1−α)ρ(Y) for all X,Y∈XX,Y\in\mathcal XX,Y∈X and α∈[0,1]\alpha\in[0,1]α∈[0,1];
  • (A2) monotonicity: if Y⪰XY\succeq XY⪰X then ρ(Y)≥ρ(X)\rho(Y)\ge\rho(X)ρ(Y)≥ρ(X).

A linear functional l:X→Rl:\mathcal X\to\mathbb Rl:X→R, not necessarily continuous, is an algebraic subgradient of ρ\rhoρ at Xˉ\bar XXˉ if

ρ(X)≥ρ(Xˉ)+l(X−Xˉ)∀X∈X.(3.1)\rho(X)\ge\rho(\bar X)+l(X-\bar X)\qquad\forall X\in\mathcal X.\tag{3.1}ρ(X)≥ρ(Xˉ)+l(X−Xˉ)∀X∈X.(3.1)

When X\mathcal XX is a Banach space it carries its norm topology and is paired with its dual Y:=X∗\mathcal Y:=\mathcal X^*Y:=X∗. The subdifferential ∂ρ(Xˉ)\partial\rho(\bar X)∂ρ(Xˉ) is the set of continuous l∈X∗l\in\mathcal X^*l∈X∗ satisfying (3.1), and ρ\rhoρ is subdifferentiable at Xˉ\bar XXˉ if ∂ρ(Xˉ)≠∅\partial\rho(\bar X)\neq\emptyset∂ρ(Xˉ)=∅.

A Banach lattice is a real Banach space X\mathcal XX whose order makes it a lattice, compatible with addition, such that ∣X1∣≤∣X2∣|X_1|\le|X_2|∣X1​∣≤∣X2​∣ implies ∥X1∥≤∥X2∥\|X_1\|\le\|X_2\|∥X1​∥≤∥X2​∥. Every Lp(Ω,F,μˉ)\mathcal L_p(\Omega,\mathcal F,\bar\mu)Lp​(Ω,F,μˉ​), p∈[1,+∞]p\in[1,+\infty]p∈[1,+∞], with the almost-everywhere order, is one.

In Lean everything lives in the namespace ConvexRiskFn.Cont: dom, IsProper, A1, A2, IsAlgSubgradient and subdiff are defined in the setting file.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3.1 (p. 437)

Let X\mathcal XX be a Banach lattice and ρ:X→R‾\rho:\mathcal X\to\overline{\mathbb R}ρ:X→R proper, satisfying (A1) and (A2). Then

ρ is continuous on int⁡(dom⁡ρ),∂ρ(Xˉ)≠∅  for every Xˉ∈int⁡(dom⁡ρ).\rho \text{ is continuous on } \operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom}\rho), \qquad \partial\rho(\bar X)\neq\emptyset \ \text{ for every } \bar X\in\operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom}\rho).ρ is continuous on int(domρ),∂ρ(Xˉ)=∅  for every Xˉ∈int(domρ).

Milestones (the steps of the paper's argument, pp. 436–437)

  1. At Xˉ∈int⁡(dom⁡ρ)\bar X\in\operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom}\rho)Xˉ∈int(domρ) the directional derivative δ(X)=ρ′(Xˉ,X)=lim⁡t↓0(ρ(Xˉ+tX)−ρ(Xˉ))/t\delta(X)=\rho'(\bar X,X)=\lim_{t\downarrow0}(\rho(\bar X+tX)-\rho(\bar X))/tδ(X)=ρ′(Xˉ,X)=limt↓0​(ρ(Xˉ+tX)−ρ(Xˉ))/t is finite, positively homogeneous and convex, and ρ(X)≥ρ(Xˉ)+δ(X−Xˉ)\rho(X)\ge\rho(\bar X)+\delta(X-\bar X)ρ(X)≥ρ(Xˉ)+δ(X−Xˉ).
  2. ρ\rhoρ has an algebraic subgradient at every Xˉ∈int⁡(dom⁡ρ)\bar X\in\operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom}\rho)Xˉ∈int(domρ).
  3. Under (A2) an algebraic subgradient is positive: l(X)≥0l(X)\ge0l(X)≥0 for X⪰0X\succeq0X⪰0.
  4. (Levin) Every positive linear functional on a Banach lattice is continuous.
  5. If l∈∂ρ(Xˉ)l\in\partial\rho(\bar X)l∈∂ρ(Xˉ), then ρ\rhoρ is lower semicontinuous at Xˉ\bar XXˉ.
  6. (Phelps) A proper convex ρ\rhoρ on a Banach space that is lower semicontinuous at every point of int⁡(dom⁡ρ)\operatorname{int}(\operatorname{dom}\rho)int(domρ) is continuous there.

Companions

  • Corollary 3.1 (p. 437): for X=Lp(Ω,F,μˉ)\mathcal X=\mathcal L_p(\Omega,\mathcal F,\bar\mu)X=Lp​(Ω,F,μˉ​), p∈[1,+∞)p\in[1,+\infty)p∈[1,+∞), paired with Lq\mathcal L_qLq​, the same conclusion, with subgradients represented by g∈Lqg\in\mathcal L_qg∈Lq​ through ∫g (X−Xˉ) dμˉ\int g\,(X-\bar X)\,d\bar\mu∫g(X−Xˉ)dμˉ​.
  • Real-valued case (p. 437): if moreover ρ(X)<+∞\rho(X)<+\inftyρ(X)<+∞ for every XXX, then ρ\rhoρ is continuous on all of X\mathcal XX and subdifferentiable everywhere.

Significance

Proposition 3.1 removes lower semicontinuity from the list of assumptions a modeller has to check. In the paper's framework, the dual representation ρ(X)=sup⁡μ∈A{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)}\rho(X)=\sup_{\mu\in\mathcal A}\{\langle\mu,X\rangle-\rho^*(\mu)\}ρ(X)=supμ∈A​{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)} (Theorem 2.2) requires lower semicontinuity. The subdifferential formulas, the Hadamard directional differentiability of composite functions ρ(F(z))\rho(F(z))ρ(F(z)) and the optimality conditions of §§3.2 and 6 require continuity or subdifferentiability at the point of interest. On Lp\mathcal L_pLp​ spaces, Corollary 3.1 gives all of these on the interior of the domain from (A1) and (A2) alone, for example for real-valued convex monotone risk functions such as the mean–upper-semideviation and conditional value-at-risk models of §4.

The result is proved in the paper, so the formalization adds no new mathematics. It does add two classical functional-analytic facts that the paper cites without proof: automatic continuity of positive functionals on Banach lattices, and continuity of lower semicontinuous convex functions on open subsets of Banach spaces, here for extended-real-valued functions. As far as a search of Mathlib and of the platform shows, neither is formalized in this generality. Mathlib's continuity result for convex functions is finite-dimensional. Mathlib has the Hahn–Banach extension theorem but no theory of positive functionals on Banach lattices.

Difficulty

An algebraic subgradient exists at an interior point by Hahn–Banach applied to the directional derivative, and in a general Banach space it may be discontinuous. Continuity cannot come from local boundedness either: the usual criterion (bounded above near a point) is exactly what fails for natural examples, since positive cones in Lp\mathcal L_pLp​, p<∞p<\inftyp<∞, have empty interior. The order structure has to do the work. Monotonicity forces the subgradient to be positive, and positivity forces continuity on a Banach lattice. That last step needs completeness and solidity of the norm. Without them, positive linear functionals need not be continuous, for example on the space of finitely supported sequences.

The second difficulty is passing from lower semicontinuity at each interior point to continuity on the interior. For a convex function this needs a Baire category argument on the Banach space, and completeness cannot be dropped.

Formalization scope

  • The Banach lattice is abstract: a type E with NormedAddCommGroup, NormedSpace ℝ, CompleteSpace, Lattice, HasSolidNorm (the solidity condition) and IsOrderedAddMonoid. This is the paper's definition, and it contains the paper's function spaces, so the formal goal is a generalization. Compatibility of the order with multiplication by nonnegative scalars is not assumed; it follows from these axioms.
  • R‾\overline{\mathbb R}R is EReal. Convexity (A1) is written with EReal arithmetic, which agrees with the paper's for proper functions. Continuity on the interior is continuity of an EReal-valued function in the order topology. On the interior the function is finite, so this is ordinary continuity.
  • Subgradients in the goal are continuous linear functionals E →L[ℝ] ℝ, i.e. Y=X∗\mathcal Y=\mathcal X^*Y=X∗. A version stating only an algebraic (possibly discontinuous) subgradient would be the easy half of the result and is not the goal; it is milestone 2.
  • The interior of the domain may be empty. The goal is then vacuous, as on the page. The domain is never assumed to be all of X\mathcal XX, except in the real-valued companion, where the page assumes it.
  • Corollary 3.1 uses Mathlib's Lp ℝ p μbar (a.e. classes) with a finite measure μˉ\bar\muμˉ​ (the paper's measures are finite, p. 434) and p≠∞p\neq\inftyp=∞. Its subgradient is a function ggg with MemLp g q μbar for the Hölder conjugate qqq, paired by the integral.
  • Needed infrastructure: one-sided directional derivatives of extended-valued convex functions, Hahn–Banach for sublinear functionals (exists_extension_of_le_sublinear in Mathlib), positive functionals on Banach lattices, and the Baire-category continuity theorem for convex lower semicontinuous functions. The last two are reusable well beyond risk functions. Contributions proving any milestone, or proving the Phelps or Levin step in greater generality, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Ruszczyński, A. Shapiro, Optimization of convex risk functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 31(3):433–452, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1050.0186
  • V. L. Levin, Convex Analysis in Spaces of Measurable Functions and Its Applications in Economics, Nauka, Moscow, 1985 (cited as [11]: Lemma 1.1, Theorem 0.12).
  • R. R. Phelps, Convex Functions, Monotone Operators and Differentiability, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1364, Springer, 1989 (cited as [19]: Theorem 3.3).
  • A. D. Ioffe, V. M. Tihomirov, Theory of Extremal Problems, North-Holland, 1979 (cited as [9]).
  • P. Artzner, F. Delbaen, J.-M. Eber, D. Heath, Coherent measures of risk, Mathematical Finance 9(3):203–228, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-9965.00068
  • H. Föllmer, A. Schied, Convex measures of risk and trading constraints, Finance and Stochastics 6(4):429–447, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1007/s007800200072
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimization of Convex Risk Functions 1: Dual Representation of a Lower Semicontinuous Convex Risk Function, with Monotonicity, Translation Equivariance and Homogeneity Read Off Its Dual DomainResearch Paper

Motivation

A risk function assigns to an uncertain cost XXX (a function of the random state ω\omegaω) a single number ρ(X)\rho(X)ρ(X) that a decision maker can minimize. Artzner, Delbaen, Eber and Heath (Math. Finance 9, 1999) singled out four axioms, convexity, monotonicity, translation equivariance and positive homogeneity, and called real-valued functions satisfying all four coherent. Föllmer and Schied (Finance Stoch. 6, 2002) and Frittelli and Rosazza Gianin dropped homogeneity to obtain convex risk measures. In each of these works, a central result is a dual representation: the risk function is a supremum of expectations under a family of probability measures, possibly with a penalty.

Ruszczyński and Shapiro (Math. Oper. Res. 31, 2006) place these representations inside general conjugate duality. Their Theorem 2.2 shows that, for any proper, lower semicontinuous, convex risk function on a locally convex space of measurable functions paired with a space of signed measures, the representation holds over the domain of the conjugate, and each remaining axiom corresponds exactly to a property of the measures in that domain. The paper then builds its optimization theory (subdifferentials of composite risk functions, optimality conditions, duality for nonanticipativity constraints) on this representation.

Timeline. Artzner et al. (1999): the coherent axioms, with a representation for finite Ω\OmegaΩ. Delbaen (2002): coherent measures on L∞L^\inftyL∞ under the Fatou property. Föllmer–Schied (2002): convex risk measures on bounded functions. Cheridito, Delbaen and Kupper (2004): spaces of processes. Rockafellar, Uryasev and Zabarankin (2002–2006): the risk envelope in L2\mathcal L_2L2​. Ruszczyński–Shapiro (2006): the general paired-space statement formalized here.

Setting

Outcomes are costs: smaller values of XXX are better. Let (Ω,F)(\Omega,\mathcal F)(Ω,F) be a measurable space and Y\mathbb YY the space of finite signed measures on it. The mission fixes

  1. a real locally convex topological vector space X\mathcal XX of F\mathcal FF-measurable functions X:Ω→RX:\Omega\to\mathbb RX:Ω→R, with its own topology (for instance a norm), not necessarily pointwise convergence;
  2. a linear subspace Y⊆Y\mathcal Y\subseteq\mathbb YY⊆Y with ∫Ω∣X∣ d∣μ∣<∞\int_\Omega|X|\,d|\mu|<\infty∫Ω​∣X∣d∣μ∣<∞ for all X∈XX\in\mathcal XX∈X, μ∈Y\mu\in\mathcal Yμ∈Y, where ∣μ∣=μ++μ−|\mu|=\mu^++\mu^-∣μ∣=μ++μ−;
  3. the pairing ⟨μ,X⟩=∫ΩX dμ=∫X dμ+−∫X dμ−\langle\mu,X\rangle=\int_\Omega X\,d\mu=\int X\,d\mu^+-\int X\,d\mu^-⟨μ,X⟩=∫Ω​Xdμ=∫Xdμ+−∫Xdμ−, compatible with the topology of X\mathcal XX: every ⟨μ,⋅⟩\langle\mu,\cdot\rangle⟨μ,⋅⟩ is continuous, and every continuous linear functional on X\mathcal XX is some ⟨μ,⋅⟩\langle\mu,\cdot\rangle⟨μ,⋅⟩, μ∈Y\mu\in\mathcal Yμ∈Y.

Write X+\mathcal X_+X+​ for the nonnegative functions, Y⪰XY\succeq XY⪰X for Y(ω)≥X(ω)Y(\omega)\ge X(\omega)Y(ω)≥X(ω) for all ω\omegaω, Y+\mathcal Y_+Y+​ for the nonnegative measures in Y\mathcal YY, and P\mathcal PP for the probability measures in Y\mathcal YY. Condition (C) requires that every μ∈Y∖Y+\mu\in\mathcal Y\setminus\mathcal Y_+μ∈Y∖Y+​ have ⟨μ,X⟩<0\langle\mu,X\rangle<0⟨μ,X⟩<0 for some X∈X+X\in\mathcal X_+X∈X+​.

A risk function ρ:X→R‾\rho:\mathcal X\to\overline{\mathbb R}ρ:X→R is proper if it never equals −∞-\infty−∞ and is finite somewhere. The axioms are

  • (A1) ρ(αX+(1−α)Y)≤αρ(X)+(1−α)ρ(Y)\rho(\alpha X+(1-\alpha)Y)\le\alpha\rho(X)+(1-\alpha)\rho(Y)ρ(αX+(1−α)Y)≤αρ(X)+(1−α)ρ(Y), α∈[0,1]\alpha\in[0,1]α∈[0,1];
  • (A2) Y⪰X⇒ρ(Y)≥ρ(X)Y\succeq X\Rightarrow\rho(Y)\ge\rho(X)Y⪰X⇒ρ(Y)≥ρ(X);
  • (A3) ρ(X+a)=ρ(X)+a\rho(X+a)=\rho(X)+aρ(X+a)=ρ(X)+a, a∈Ra\in\mathbb Ra∈R;
  • (A4) ρ(tX)=tρ(X)\rho(tX)=t\rho(X)ρ(tX)=tρ(X), t>0t>0t>0.

The conjugate is ρ∗(μ)=sup⁡X∈X{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ(X)}\rho^*(\mu)=\sup_{X\in\mathcal X}\{\langle\mu,X\rangle-\rho(X)\}ρ∗(μ)=supX∈X​{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ(X)}, the biconjugate ρ∗∗(X)=sup⁡μ∈Y{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)}\rho^{**}(X)=\sup_{\mu\in\mathcal Y}\{\langle\mu,X\rangle-\rho^*(\mu)\}ρ∗∗(X)=supμ∈Y​{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)}, the dual domain A=dom⁡ρ∗={μ∈Y:ρ∗(μ)<+∞}\mathcal A=\operatorname{dom}\rho^*=\{\mu\in\mathcal Y:\rho^*(\mu)<+\infty\}A=domρ∗={μ∈Y:ρ∗(μ)<+∞}, and lsc⁡(ρ)(X)=lim inf⁡Z→Xρ(Z)\operatorname{lsc}(\rho)(X)=\liminf_{Z\to X}\rho(Z)lsc(ρ)(X)=liminfZ→X​ρ(Z) the lower semicontinuous hull. In Lean these are pair, PairedSpaces, CondC, IsProper, A1–A4, conj, biconj, dualDom and lscHull in ConvexRiskFn.Dual.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.2 (p. 435)

Under condition (C), for ρ\rhoρ proper, lower semicontinuous and convex,

ρ(X)=sup⁡μ∈A{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)}∀X,(2.6)\rho(X)=\sup_{\mu\in\mathcal A}\{\langle\mu,X\rangle-\rho^*(\mu)\}\quad\forall X,\qquad(2.6)ρ(X)=μ∈Asup​{⟨μ,X⟩−ρ∗(μ)}∀X,(2.6)

and (i) (A2) holds iff every μ∈A\mu\in\mathcal Aμ∈A is nonnegative; (ii) when X\mathcal XX contains the constant function 111, (A3) holds iff μ(Ω)=1\mu(\Omega)=1μ(Ω)=1 for all μ∈A\mu\in\mathcal Aμ∈A; (iii) (A4) holds iff ρ(X)=sup⁡μ∈A⟨μ,X⟩\rho(X)=\sup_{\mu\in\mathcal A}\langle\mu,X\rangleρ(X)=supμ∈A​⟨μ,X⟩ for all XXX (2.7).

Milestones

  1. Under (C), Y+={μ∈Y:⟨μ,X⟩≥0 ∀X∈X+}\mathcal Y_+=\{\mu\in\mathcal Y:\langle\mu,X\rangle\ge0\ \forall X\in\mathcal X_+\}Y+​={μ∈Y:⟨μ,X⟩≥0 ∀X∈X+​} (p. 434).
  2. Theorem 2.1 (Fenchel–Moreau): ρ∗∗=lsc⁡(ρ)\rho^{**}=\operatorname{lsc}(\rho)ρ∗∗=lsc(ρ) for convex proper ρ\rhoρ with lsc⁡(ρ)>−∞\operatorname{lsc}(\rho)>-\inftylsc(ρ)>−∞.
  3. The representation (2.6) by itself.
  4. Under (C) and (A2), ρ∗(μ)=+∞\rho^*(\mu)=+\inftyρ∗(μ)=+∞ for μ∉Y+\mu\notin\mathcal Y_+μ∈/Y+​.
  5. Under (A3), ρ∗(μ)=+∞\rho^*(\mu)=+\inftyρ∗(μ)=+∞ when μ(Ω)≠1\mu(\Omega)\ne1μ(Ω)=1.
  6. Under (A4), ρ∗\rho^*ρ∗ is the indicator function of {μ∈Y:⟨μ,⋅⟩≤ρ}\{\mu\in\mathcal Y:\langle\mu,\cdot\rangle\le\rho\}{μ∈Y:⟨μ,⋅⟩≤ρ}.

Companion: the risk envelope (2.8), p. 436

Under (A1)–(A3), (2.6) holds with A⊆P\mathcal A\subseteq\mathcal PA⊆P; adding (A4), ρ∗\rho^*ρ∗ is the indicator of A={μ∈P:⟨μ,X⟩≤ρ(X) ∀X}\mathcal A=\{\mu\in\mathcal P:\langle\mu,X\rangle\le\rho(X)\ \forall X\}A={μ∈P:⟨μ,X⟩≤ρ(X) ∀X}.

Significance

Theorem 2.2 is the unifying statement behind the dual representations of coherent and convex risk measures: one theorem covers bounded measurable functions paired with all finite signed measures, Lp\mathcal L_pLp​ paired with Lq\mathcal L_qLq​, and weak topologies. Downstream, the paper uses it to describe subdifferentials of risk functions as subsets of A\mathcal AA, to derive optimality conditions for min⁡zρ(F(z))\min_z\rho(F(z))minz​ρ(F(z)), and to obtain the risk envelope (2.8) used in distributionally robust optimization.

The result is proved in the paper, assuming Fenchel–Moreau in locally convex spaces as a cited theorem. As far as is known, neither Theorem 2.2 nor Fenchel–Moreau for extended-real functions on a general locally convex space has a machine-checked proof. At the pinned revision Mathlib has geometric Hahn–Banach separation in locally convex spaces but no Fenchel conjugate at all. A formal proof of the goal would yield, in particular, a reusable Fenchel–Moreau theorem for extended-real convex functions under a measure pairing.

Difficulty

The characterizations (i)–(iii) are short once (2.6) is available; the weight sits in (2.6), that is, in Fenchel–Moreau. Its proof separates a point below the epigraph from the closed convex epigraph in X×R\mathcal X\times\mathbb RX×R, which needs Hahn–Banach in a locally convex space, the identification of the separating functional with a measure in Y\mathcal YY through the compatibility assumption, and a careful case analysis when the separating hyperplane is vertical, a case that occurs because ρ\rhoρ may take the value +∞+\infty+∞. The extended-real arithmetic (r−(+∞)=−∞r-(+\infty)=-\inftyr−(+∞)=−∞, 0⋅(+∞)=00\cdot(+\infty)=00⋅(+∞)=0) has to be tracked through every supremum. A finite-dimensional argument does not transfer: X\mathcal XX is an arbitrary locally convex space, and lower semicontinuity is with respect to its own topology.

Formalization scope

X\mathcal XX is an abstract real vector space with a topology and the instances IsTopologicalAddGroup, ContinuousSMul ℝ, LocallyConvexSpace ℝ (no Hausdorff assumption), mapped injectively and linearly into Ω→R\Omega\to\mathbb RΩ→R. Y\mathcal YY is a Submodule ℝ (SignedMeasure Ω). The pairing is the difference of the Bochner integrals against the Jordan parts; integrability against ∣μ∣|\mu|∣μ∣ is a field of the structure, so the pairing is never the junk value of a non-integrable integral. The topology of Y\mathcal YY is not modelled, since no statement uses it. Risk functions take values in EReal, and every supremum is an iSup in EReal. The order ⪰\succeq⪰ is pointwise, not almost everywhere. The constant aaa in (A3) is a⋅1a\cdot\mathbf 1a⋅1 for an element 1∈X\mathbf 1\in\mathcal X1∈X equal to the constant function 111. Condition (C) is a separate hypothesis, assumed where it is used.

Two statements depart from the page, and both departures are disclosed in their items. Theorem 2.1 carries the extra hypothesis lsc⁡(ρ)>−∞\operatorname{lsc}(\rho)>-\inftylsc(ρ)>−∞, without which the printed statement is false in infinite dimension; Theorem 2.1 is a cited result, and the goal does not depend on this choice. The indicator-function milestone names the set {μ:⟨μ,⋅⟩≤ρ}\{\mu:\langle\mu,\cdot\rangle\le\rho\}{μ:⟨μ,⋅⟩≤ρ} explicitly instead of "a closed convex subset of Y\mathcal YY".

The goal mentions neither ρ∗∗\rho^{**}ρ∗∗ nor lsc⁡(ρ)\operatorname{lsc}(\rho)lsc(ρ): it is stated about ρ\rhoρ, ρ∗\rho^*ρ∗ and A\mathcal AA alone, and a proof must establish (2.6) from the hypotheses, not assume it. The hypotheses are satisfiable: a one-point Ω\OmegaΩ with X=R{∗}\mathcal X=\mathbb R^{\{\ast\}}X=R{∗}, Y=Y\mathcal Y=\mathbb YY=Y and ρ(X)=X(∗)\rho(X)=X(\ast)ρ(X)=X(∗) meets all of them, including (C) and (A1)–(A4).

Contributions are welcome at every level: Fenchel–Moreau for EReal-valued convex functions on locally convex spaces (reusable well beyond this mission), lemmas about the pairing (linearity, ⟨μ,1⟩=μ(Ω)\langle\mu,1\rangle=\mu(\Omega)⟨μ,1⟩=μ(Ω), positivity), and the milestones in the order listed.

Selected references

  • A. Ruszczyński, A. Shapiro, Optimization of convex risk functions, Mathematics of Operations Research 31(3):433–452, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1050.0186
  • P. Artzner, F. Delbaen, J.-M. Eber, D. Heath, Coherent measures of risk, Mathematical Finance 9(3):203–228, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-9965.00068
  • H. Föllmer, A. Schied, Convex measures of risk and trading constraints, Finance and Stochastics 6(4):429–447, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1007/s007800200072
  • F. Delbaen, Coherent risk measures on general probability spaces, in Advances in Finance and Stochastics, Springer, 2002, 1–37. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-04790-3_1
  • P. Cheridito, F. Delbaen, M. Kupper, Coherent and convex monetary risk measures for bounded càdlàg processes, Stochastic Processes and their Applications 112(1):1–22, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.spa.2004.01.009
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Conjugate Duality and Optimization, SIAM, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970524
  • R. T. Rockafellar, S. Uryasev, M. Zabarankin, Generalized deviations in risk analysis, Finance and Stochastics 10(1):51–74, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00780-005-0165-8
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algebra·Captain: marwahaha

A nonspectrahedral hyperbolicity coneOpen Problem

Motivation

Hyperbolic polynomials define convex optimization regions through real-rooted line restrictions. A spectrahedral representation would describe the same region by one finite symmetric positive-semidefinite matrix inequality. The source manuscript presents the surrounding research claim.

Setting

The formal ambient space consists of two real symmetric 4×4 matrices X,Z and a vector y∈ℝ³. A fixed determinant expression defines a multivariate polynomial p. At e=((I,I),0), the cone consists of x for which every complex root of t↦p(te−x) is real and nonnegative.

Formalization target

Prove dim(ambient)=23, p(e)=1, and

p is homogeneous of degree 20,deg⁡p=20,p\text{ is homogeneous of degree }20,\qquad\deg p=20,p is homogeneous of degree 20,degp=20,

with every line polynomial real-rooted. For every N>0 and linear symmetric pencil L, prove

cone⁡(p,e)≠{x:L(x)⪰0}.\operatorname{cone}(p,e)\ne\{x:L(x)\succeq0\}.cone(p,e)={x:L(x)⪰0}.

The selected formal target is OAI.Paper256.main_result.

Significance and status

The formal target rules out every finite homogeneous real symmetric pencil size. It also verifies the algebraic and root properties of its fixed polynomial. The published target is currently Open; the manuscript's argument and a checked Lean proof are separate deliverables.

Difficulty

Excluding one determinantal expression is weaker than excluding all matrix-inequality representations of the cone. The final universal quantifier ranges over all positive dimensions and all real linear pencils.

Formalization scope

The published Lean formula has asserted degree 20. The manuscript abstract describes degree 16; this draft follows the actual published degree-20 statement rather than substituting the manuscript number. Symmetric matrices use selfAdjoint, and positivity is Matrix.PosSemidef. No affine pencil or projected semidefinite lift is asserted here.

Selected references

  • OpenAI, A nonspectrahedral hyperbolicity cone, preprint, 2026. Pinned manuscript.
  • OpenAI, accompanying formal statements, commit adc7f1241b42. Goal source.
35 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Implementing a Primal-Dual Interior-Point Method for Conic Quadratic Optimization III: A Newton Step Scales the Homogeneous Residuals and the Complementarity Gap by 1 − α(1 − γ)Research Paper

Motivation

Conic quadratic optimization — linear optimization over products of quadratic (second-order, Lorentz) cones — covers robust linear programming, portfolio problems with risk constraints, norm minimization and many engineering design problems. Andersen, Roos and Terlaky describe the primal-dual interior-point method implemented in the MOSEK optimizer for this problem class (Math. Program. 95 (2003)). Their algorithm does not solve the primal and dual problems directly. It solves the homogeneous model, an embedding that has a solution whether or not the original problem is feasible, and from which either an optimal pair or a certificate of infeasibility is read off.

The convergence argument of such a method rests on one algebraic property of its search direction: a step along the Newton direction reduces the infeasibility of the homogeneous model and its complementarity gap at the same rate. For linear programming this is classical (Xu, Hung and Ye, 1996; Andersen and Andersen, 2000). This mission formalizes the conic quadratic version, Lemma 4.1 of the paper, in which the diagonal complementarity products of linear programming are replaced by arrow-head matrices.

Setting

The cone is a product K=K1×⋯×KkK = K^1\times\cdots\times K^kK=K1×⋯×Kk. Each factor Ki⊆RniK^i\subseteq\mathbb R^{n^i}Ki⊆Rni is one of three kinds:

  • the half-line R+={x∈R:x≥0}\mathbb R_+ = \{x\in\mathbb R : x\ge0\}R+​={x∈R:x≥0}, with ni=1n^i = 1ni=1;
  • the quadratic cone Kq={x∈Rn:x12≥∥x2:n∥2, x1≥0}K^q = \{x\in\mathbb R^{n} : x_1^2\ge\|x_{2:n}\|^2,\ x_1\ge0\}Kq={x∈Rn:x12​≥∥x2:n​∥2, x1​≥0}, with ni≥1n^i\ge1ni≥1;
  • the rotated quadratic cone Kr={x∈Rn:2x1x2≥∥x3:n∥2, x1,x2≥0}K^r = \{x\in\mathbb R^{n} : 2x_1x_2\ge\|x_{3:n}\|^2,\ x_1,x_2\ge0\}Kr={x∈Rn:2x1​x2​≥∥x3:n​∥2, x1​,x2​≥0}, with ni≥2n^i\ge2ni≥2.

Vectors are partitioned by cones, x=(x1;… ;xk)x = (x^1;\dots;x^k)x=(x1;…;xk), and xTs=∑i(xi)Tsix^Ts = \sum_i (x^i)^Ts^ixTs=∑i​(xi)Tsi. To each cone is attached a symmetric orthogonal matrix TiT^iTi: the identity for R+\mathbb R_+R+​ and KqK^qKq, and for KrK^rKr the identity with its leading 2×22\times22×2 block replaced by 12[111−1]\frac{1}{\sqrt2}\begin{bmatrix}1&1\\1&-1\end{bmatrix}2​1​[11​1−1​]. For v∈Rdv\in\mathbb R^dv∈Rd the arrow-head matrix is

mat⁡(v)=[v1v2:dTv2:dv1I].\operatorname{mat}(v) = \begin{bmatrix} v_1 & v_{2:d}^T\\ v_{2:d} & v_1 I\end{bmatrix}.mat(v)=[v1​v2:d​​v2:dT​v1​I​].

At a point (x,s)(x,s)(x,s) put Xi=mat⁡(Tixi)X^i = \operatorname{mat}(T^ix^i)Xi=mat(Tixi), Si=mat⁡(Tisi)S^i = \operatorname{mat}(T^is^i)Si=mat(Tisi), and let XXX, SSS, TTT be block diagonal with blocks XiX^iXi, SiS^iSi, TiT^iTi. Let eie^iei be the first unit vector of Rni\mathbb R^{n^i}Rni and e=(e1;… ;ek)e = (e^1;\dots;e^k)e=(e1;…;ek).

The data are A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n, b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm, c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn. A current point is (x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0))(x^{(0)},\tau^{(0)},y^{(0)},s^{(0)},\kappa^{(0)})(x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0)), with

μ(0)=(x(0))Ts(0)+τ(0)κ(0)k+1.\mu^{(0)} = \frac{(x^{(0)})^Ts^{(0)} + \tau^{(0)}\kappa^{(0)}}{k+1}.μ(0)=k+1(x(0))Ts(0)+τ(0)κ(0)​.

For a centering parameter γ∈[0,1]\gamma\in[0,1]γ∈[0,1] the Newton direction (dx,dτ,dy,ds,dκ)(d_x,d_\tau,d_y,d_s,d_\kappa)(dx​,dτ​,dy​,ds​,dκ​) solves the linear system (22):

Adx−bdτ=(γ−1)(Ax(0)−bτ(0)),ATdy+ds−cdτ=(γ−1)(ATy(0)+s(0)−cτ(0)),−cTdx+bTdy−dκ=(γ−1)(−cTx(0)+bTy(0)−κ(0)),X(0)Tds+S(0)Tdx=−X(0)S(0)e+γμ(0)e,τ(0)dκ+κ(0)dτ=−τ(0)κ(0)+γμ(0).\begin{aligned} A d_x - b d_\tau &= (\gamma-1)(Ax^{(0)} - b\tau^{(0)}),\\ A^Td_y + d_s - c d_\tau &= (\gamma-1)(A^Ty^{(0)} + s^{(0)} - c\tau^{(0)}),\\ -c^Td_x + b^Td_y - d_\kappa &= (\gamma-1)(-c^Tx^{(0)} + b^Ty^{(0)} - \kappa^{(0)}),\\ X^{(0)}Td_s + S^{(0)}Td_x &= -X^{(0)}S^{(0)}e + \gamma\mu^{(0)}e,\\ \tau^{(0)}d_\kappa + \kappa^{(0)}d_\tau &= -\tau^{(0)}\kappa^{(0)} + \gamma\mu^{(0)}. \end{aligned}Adx​−bdτ​ATdy​+ds​−cdτ​−cTdx​+bTdy​−dκ​X(0)Tds​+S(0)Tdx​τ(0)dκ​+κ(0)dτ​​=(γ−1)(Ax(0)−bτ(0)),=(γ−1)(ATy(0)+s(0)−cτ(0)),=(γ−1)(−cTx(0)+bTy(0)−κ(0)),=−X(0)S(0)e+γμ(0)e,=−τ(0)κ(0)+γμ(0).​

The new point is (x(1),τ(1),y(1),s(1),κ(1))=(x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0))+α(dx,dτ,dy,ds,dκ)(x^{(1)},\tau^{(1)},y^{(1)},s^{(1)},\kappa^{(1)}) = (x^{(0)},\tau^{(0)},y^{(0)},s^{(0)},\kappa^{(0)}) + \alpha(d_x,d_\tau,d_y,d_s,d_\kappa)(x(1),τ(1),y(1),s(1),κ(1))=(x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0))+α(dx​,dτ​,dy​,ds​,dκ​) for a step size α∈[0,1]\alpha\in[0,1]α∈[0,1] (23).

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 4.1 (p. 13)

Under (22) and (23),

Ax(1)−bτ(1)=(1−α(1−γ))(Ax(0)−bτ(0)),ATy(1)+s(1)−cτ(1)=(1−α(1−γ))(ATy(0)+s(0)−cτ(0)),−cTx(1)+bTy(1)−κ(1)=(1−α(1−γ))(−cTx(0)+bTy(0)−κ(0)),dxTds+dτdκ=0,(x(1))Ts(1)+τ(1)κ(1)=(1−α(1−γ))((x(0))Ts(0)+τ(0)κ(0)).\begin{aligned} Ax^{(1)} - b\tau^{(1)} &= (1-\alpha(1-\gamma))(Ax^{(0)} - b\tau^{(0)}),\\ A^Ty^{(1)} + s^{(1)} - c\tau^{(1)} &= (1-\alpha(1-\gamma))(A^Ty^{(0)} + s^{(0)} - c\tau^{(0)}),\\ -c^Tx^{(1)} + b^Ty^{(1)} - \kappa^{(1)} &= (1-\alpha(1-\gamma))(-c^Tx^{(0)} + b^Ty^{(0)} - \kappa^{(0)}),\\ d_x^Td_s + d_\tau d_\kappa &= 0,\\ (x^{(1)})^Ts^{(1)} + \tau^{(1)}\kappa^{(1)} &= (1-\alpha(1-\gamma))\big((x^{(0)})^Ts^{(0)} + \tau^{(0)}\kappa^{(0)}\big). \end{aligned}Ax(1)−bτ(1)ATy(1)+s(1)−cτ(1)−cTx(1)+bTy(1)−κ(1)dxT​ds​+dτ​dκ​(x(1))Ts(1)+τ(1)κ(1)​=(1−α(1−γ))(Ax(0)−bτ(0)),=(1−α(1−γ))(ATy(0)+s(0)−cτ(0)),=(1−α(1−γ))(−cTx(0)+bTy(0)−κ(0)),=0,=(1−α(1−γ))((x(0))Ts(0)+τ(0)κ(0)).​

Milestones

  1. (25), p. 13: with η=1−γ\eta = 1-\gammaη=1−γ, the shifted point η(x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0))+d\eta(x^{(0)},\tau^{(0)},y^{(0)},s^{(0)},\kappa^{(0)}) + dη(x(0),τ(0),y(0),s(0),κ(0))+d satisfies the three linear equations of the homogeneous model.
  2. (26), p. 13: 0=(ηx(0)+dx)T(ηs(0)+ds)+(ητ(0)+dτ)(ηκ(0)+dκ)0 = (\eta x^{(0)}+d_x)^T(\eta s^{(0)}+d_s) + (\eta\tau^{(0)}+d_\tau)(\eta\kappa^{(0)}+d_\kappa)0=(ηx(0)+dx​)T(ηs(0)+ds​)+(ητ(0)+dτ​)(ηκ(0)+dκ​), and its expansion in powers of η\etaη.
  3. (61), p. 36: eTXSe=∑i(Tixi)TTisi=xTse^TXSe = \sum_i (T^ix^i)^TT^is^i = x^TseTXSe=∑i​(Tixi)TTisi=xTs for all xxx, sss.
  4. p. 14, first equality: (x(0))Tds+(s(0))Tdx=eT(X(0)Tds+S(0)Tdx)(x^{(0)})^Td_s + (s^{(0)})^Td_x = e^T(X^{(0)}Td_s + S^{(0)}Td_x)(x(0))Tds​+(s(0))Tdx​=eT(X(0)Tds​+S(0)Tdx​), for all vectors.
  5. p. 14, the chain's value: (x(0))Tds+(s(0))Tdx+τ(0)dκ+κ(0)dτ=(γ−1)μ(0)(k+1)(x^{(0)})^Td_s + (s^{(0)})^Td_x + \tau^{(0)}d_\kappa + \kappa^{(0)}d_\tau = (\gamma-1)\mu^{(0)}(k+1)(x(0))Tds​+(s(0))Tdx​+τ(0)dκ​+κ(0)dτ​=(γ−1)μ(0)(k+1).
  6. p. 14, orthogonality: dxTds+dτdκ=0d_x^Td_s + d_\tau d_\kappa = 0dxT​ds​+dτ​dκ​=0.

Significance

Lemma 4.1 is what makes the homogeneous algorithm analyzable. Because the three residuals and the gap shrink by the same factor 1−α(1−γ)1-\alpha(1-\gamma)1−α(1−γ), their ratios are invariant along the iterates, and a step with γ<1\gamma<1γ<1 and α>0\alpha>0α>0 makes measurable progress toward a solution of the homogeneous model. The paper notes (p. 14) that all properties stated in Lemma 4.1 hold for the Nesterov–Todd-scaled direction (27) as well, the direction actually implemented, for which polynomial complexity is shown by Monteiro and Tsuchiya (2000).

The result is proved on the page; it is not open. As far as the platform's catalogue shows, it has not been formalized. Machine-checked versions exist only for linear-programming analogues, with diagonal complementarity products in place of arrow-head matrices. The formalization adds two things. First, it fixes three printed slips: the third line of (22) prints κ\kappaκ for κ(0)\kappa^{(0)}κ(0); the fourth identity of (24) prints dxTdsTd_x^Td_s^TdxT​dsT​; and the proof's evaluation on p. 14 ends with (γ−1)μ(0)k(\gamma-1)\mu^{(0)}k(γ−1)μ(0)k where (γ−1)μ(0)(k+1)(\gamma-1)\mu^{(0)}(k+1)(γ−1)μ(0)(k+1) is correct, since eTe=ke^Te = keTe=k and the τκ\tau\kappaτκ equation contributes the extra μ(0)\mu^{(0)}μ(0). Second, the arrow-head identities (61) and the p. 14 equality are reusable for missions on the complementarity conditions (Lemma 3.1) and the scaled directions of the same paper.

Difficulty

The first three identities of (24) are linear and follow from the first three lines of (22) alone. The content is in the last two. They need an inner-product identity that turns the fourth line of (22), a statement about arrow-head matrix products, into a statement about the scalar quantity (x(0))Tds+(s(0))Tdx(x^{(0)})^Td_s + (s^{(0)})^Td_x(x(0))Tds​+(s(0))Tdx​. The naive reading treats X(0)TdsX^{(0)}Td_sX(0)Tds​ as an abstract linear image of dsd_sds​ and loses exactly this link. What is needed is that the first row of mat⁡(v)\operatorname{mat}(v)mat(v) is vTv^TvT, that mat⁡(u)mat⁡(v)e1\operatorname{mat}(u)\operatorname{mat}(v)e_1mat(u)mat(v)e1​ has first entry uTvu^TvuTv, and that every TiT^iTi is symmetric and orthogonal. The last fails for the rotated cone when ni<2n^i<2ni<2, so the dimension conventions are not decoration. The bookkeeping constant eTe=ke^Te = keTe=k must also be tracked correctly; the page itself gets it wrong.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Blocks are indexed by Fin k; block iii is Fin (n i) → ℝ, and indices are 0-based (the paper's v1v_1v1​ is v 0). AAA is given by its column blocks AiA^iAi, so Ax=∑iAixiAx = \sum_iA^ix^iAx=∑i​Aixi, (ATy)i=(Ai)Ty(A^Ty)^i = (A^i)^Ty(ATy)i=(Ai)Ty and cTx=∑i(ci)Txic^Tx = \sum_i (c^i)^Tx^icTx=∑i​(ci)Txi. The second line of (22) and of (24), and the fourth line of (22), are stated block by block; this is equivalent because XXX, SSS, TTT are block diagonal.
  • Definitions. The shared module ConicQuadIPM.Complementarity.Setting provides the cone kinds, TiT^iTi (Tmat), mat⁡(v)\operatorname{mat}(v)mat(v) (arrow), eie^iei (e1) and the predicate WellFormed; this mission's ConicQuadIPM.NewtonStep.Setting adds μ(0)\mu^{(0)}μ(0) (mu0) and the system (22) (NewtonSystem). WellFormed is the paper's implicit dimension convention (ni=1n^i = 1ni=1, ≥1\ge1≥1, ≥2\ge2≥2 for the three kinds).
  • Hypotheses. Every theorem assumes WellFormed. This is a disclosed addition: the paper never states the dimensions, and without them a block of dimension 000 breaks eTe=ke^Te = keTe=k. The ranges α∈[0,1]\alpha\in[0,1]α∈[0,1] and γ∈[0,1]\gamma\in[0,1]γ∈[0,1] are kept as on the page, although the identities hold for all real values. No interiority or cone membership of the current point is assumed, because Lemma 4.1 does not use any. The κ\kappaκ of (22)'s third line is κ(0)\kappa^{(0)}κ(0).
  • No trivialization. The fourth line of (22) must stay in terms of arrow and Tmat. Replacing X(0)TdsX^{(0)}Td_sX(0)Tds​ by an abstract linear map, or by (x(0))Tds(x^{(0)})^Td_s(x(0))Tds​ directly, would turn milestone 4 into a definition and empty the goal. Milestone 5 states the corrected constant k+1k+1k+1; the printed kkk is false whenever γ≠1\gamma\ne1γ=1 and μ(0)≠0\mu^{(0)}\ne0μ(0)=0.
  • Reusable parts. The arrow-head lemmas (first row of mat⁡(v)\operatorname{mat}(v)mat(v), e1Tmat⁡(u)mat⁡(v)e1=uTve_1^T\operatorname{mat}(u)\operatorname{mat}(v)e_1 = u^Tve1T​mat(u)mat(v)e1​=uTv, symmetry and orthogonality of TiT^iTi) are useful beyond this mission. Contributions of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • E. D. Andersen, C. Roos, T. Terlaky, On implementing a primal-dual interior-point method for conic quadratic optimization, Mathematical Programming 95 (2003) 249–277; cited from the authors' preprint of 18 December 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-002-0349-3
  • X. Xu, P.-F. Hung, Y. Ye, A simplified homogeneous and self-dual linear programming algorithm and its implementation, Annals of Operations Research 62 (1996) 151–171. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02206815
  • E. D. Andersen, K. D. Andersen, The MOSEK interior point optimizer for linear programming: an implementation of the homogeneous algorithm, in High Performance Optimization, Kluwer (2000) 197–232. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4757-3216-0_8
  • R. D. C. Monteiro, T. Tsuchiya, Polynomial convergence of primal-dual algorithms for the second-order cone program based on the MZ-family of directions, Mathematical Programming 88 (2000) 61–83. https://doi.org/10.1007/PL00011378
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On Implementing a Primal-Dual Interior-Point Method for Conic Quadratic Optimization II: Points of a Product of Quadratic and Rotated Cones Are Complementary Iff Their Arrow-Head Products VanishResearch Paper

Motivation

Conic quadratic optimization (also called second-order cone programming) minimizes a linear function over the intersection of an affine subspace with a product of quadratic cones. It contains linear programming, convex quadratically constrained programming, robust linear programming with ellipsoidal uncertainty and many problems from engineering design; see Lobo, Vandenberghe, Boyd and Lebret (1998). Primal–dual interior-point methods solve these problems in practice; E. D. Andersen, C. Roos and T. Terlaky describe one such method, and an implementation of it linked to the MOSEK optimizer, in On implementing a primal-dual interior-point method for conic quadratic optimization (Math. Program., 2003).

A primal–dual method needs the optimality condition "the duality gap is zero" in a form that can be relaxed into a central path and linearized by Newton's method. For linear programming that form is the componentwise product xjsj=0x_js_j=0xj​sj​=0. For quadratic cones the scalar condition xTs=0x^Ts=0xTs=0 is not componentwise, and the paper's Lemma 3.1 gives the replacement: a block-wise system built from arrow-head matrices. This mission formalizes that lemma and the facts its proof uses.

Setting

A vector v∈Rnv\in\mathbb R^nv∈Rn is written v=(v1,…,vn)v=(v_1,\dots,v_n)v=(v1​,…,vn​) and v2:n=(v2,…,vn)v_{2:n}=(v_2,\dots,v_n)v2:n​=(v2​,…,vn​); ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is the Euclidean norm. The paper works with three cones (Definition 3.1):

R+={x≥0},Kq={x∈Rn:x12≥∥x2:n∥2, x1≥0},Kr={x∈Rn:2x1x2≥∥x3:n∥2, x1,x2≥0},\mathbb R_+=\{x\ge 0\},\qquad K^q=\{x\in\mathbb R^n: x_1^2\ge\|x_{2:n}\|^2,\ x_1\ge0\},\qquad K^r=\{x\in\mathbb R^n: 2x_1x_2\ge\|x_{3:n}\|^2,\ x_1,x_2\ge0\},R+​={x≥0},Kq={x∈Rn:x12​≥∥x2:n​∥2, x1​≥0},Kr={x∈Rn:2x1​x2​≥∥x3:n​∥2, x1​,x2​≥0},

the nonnegative half-line, the quadratic cone and the rotated quadratic cone. The cone of the problem is a product K=K1×⋯×KkK=K^1\times\cdots\times K^kK=K1×⋯×Kk of such cones, of dimensions n1,…,nkn^1,\dots,n^kn1,…,nk, and a point is partitioned accordingly, x=(x1;… ;xk)x=(x^1;\dots;x^k)x=(x1;…;xk); xTs=∑i(xi)Tsix^Ts=\sum_i(x^i)^Ts^ixTs=∑i​(xi)Tsi.

To each cone the paper attaches two matrices (Definition 3.2): Ti=Qi=1T^i=Q^i=1Ti=Qi=1 for R+\mathbb R_+R+​; Ti=IT^i=ITi=I and Qi=diag⁡(1,−1,…,−1)Q^i=\operatorname{diag}(1,-1,\dots,-1)Qi=diag(1,−1,…,−1) for KqK^qKq; and for KrK^rKr, TiT^iTi is the identity except for the leading block 12(111−1)\tfrac1{\sqrt2}\begin{pmatrix}1&1\\1&-1\end{pmatrix}2​1​(11​1−1​), while QiQ^iQi is −I-I−I except for the leading block (0110)\begin{pmatrix}0&1\\1&0\end{pmatrix}(01​10​). The arrow-head matrix of a vector is

mat⁡(v)=(v1v2:nTv2:nv1I),\operatorname{mat}(v)=\begin{pmatrix}v_1&v_{2:n}^T\\ v_{2:n}&v_1I\end{pmatrix},mat(v)=(v1​v2:n​​v2:nT​v1​I​),

and Xi=mat⁡(Tixi)X^i=\operatorname{mat}(T^ix^i)Xi=mat(Tixi), Si=mat⁡(Tisi)S^i=\operatorname{mat}(T^is^i)Si=mat(Tisi); eie^iei is the first unit vector of Rni\mathbb R^{n^i}Rni.

For the companion statements the paper defines μ=(xTs+τκ)/(k+1)\mu=(x^Ts+\tau\kappa)/(k+1)μ=(xTs+τκ)/(k+1) and the neighbourhood

N(β)={(x,τ,s,κ):(x;τ),(s;κ)∈K×R+, min⁡i(xi)TQixi (si)TQisi≥βμ, τκ≥βμ}.\mathcal N(\beta)=\Bigl\{(x,\tau,s,\kappa):(x;\tau),(s;\kappa)\in K\times\mathbb R_+,\ \min_i\sqrt{(x^i)^TQ^ix^i\,(s^i)^TQ^is^i}\ge\beta\mu,\ \tau\kappa\ge\beta\mu\Bigr\}.N(β)={(x,τ,s,κ):(x;τ),(s;κ)∈K×R+​, imin​(xi)TQixi(si)TQisi​≥βμ, τκ≥βμ}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 3.1 (p. 9)

For x,s∈Kx,s\in Kx,s∈K,

xTs=0  ⟺  XiSiei=SiXiei=0(i=1,…,k).x^Ts=0\iff X^iS^ie^i=S^iX^ie^i=0\quad(i=1,\dots,k).xTs=0⟺XiSiei=SiXiei=0(i=1,…,k).

This is the paper's exact statement; it fixes no constants and covers every mixture of the three cone types.

Milestones

  1. QiQi=IQ^iQ^i=IQiQi=I and TiTi=IT^iT^i=ITiTi=I, with QiQ^iQi, TiT^iTi symmetric (p. 9).
  2. Kq={x:xTQx≥0, x1≥0}K^q=\{x:x^TQx\ge0,\ x_1\ge0\}Kq={x:xTQx≥0, x1​≥0} and Kr={x:xTQx≥0, x1,x2≥0}K^r=\{x:x^TQx\ge0,\ x_1,x_2\ge0\}Kr={x:xTQx≥0, x1​,x2​≥0} (p. 9).
  3. For the rotated cone's TTT: x∈Kq  ⟺  Tx∈Krx\in K^q\iff Tx\in K^rx∈Kq⟺Tx∈Kr (p. 9).
  4. x∈Kx\in Kx∈K implies Tixi∈KqT^ix^i\in K^qTixi∈Kq for every block (Appendix, p. 36).
  5. Identity (61): (ei)TXiSiei=(Tixi)TTisi=(xi)Tsi(e^i)^TX^iS^ie^i=(T^ix^i)^TT^is^i=(x^i)^Ts^i(ei)TXiSiei=(Tixi)TTisi=(xi)Tsi, hence eTXSe=xTse^TXSe=x^TseTXSe=xTs.
  6. The explicit form of (20) for one block: (xi)Tsi=0(x^i)^Ts^i=0(xi)Tsi=0 and (Tixi)1(Tisi)2:n+(Tisi)1(Tixi)2:n=0(T^ix^i)_1(T^is^i)_{2:n}+(T^is^i)_1(T^ix^i)_{2:n}=0(Tixi)1​(Tisi)2:n​+(Tisi)1​(Tixi)2:n​=0 (p. 36).
  7. For x,s∈Kx,s\in Kx,s∈K: xTs=∑i(Tixi)TTisi≥∑i((Tixi)1(Tisi)1−∥(Tixi)2:n∥∥(Tisi)2:n∥)≥∑i(xi)TQixi(si)TQisi≥0x^Ts=\sum_i(T^ix^i)^TT^is^i\ge\sum_i\bigl((T^ix^i)_1(T^is^i)_1-\|(T^ix^i)_{2:n}\|\|(T^is^i)_{2:n}\|\bigr)\ge\sum_i\sqrt{(x^i)^TQ^ix^i(s^i)^TQ^is^i}\ge0xTs=∑i​(Tixi)TTisi≥∑i​((Tixi)1​(Tisi)1​−∥(Tixi)2:n​∥∥(Tisi)2:n​∥)≥∑i​(xi)TQixi(si)TQisi​≥0 (pp. 36–37).
  8. If xTs=0x^Ts=0xTs=0 and (Tixi)1,(Tisi)1≠0(T^ix^i)_1,(T^is^i)_1\ne0(Tixi)1​,(Tisi)1​=0, then (xi)TQixi=(si)TQisi=0(x^i)^TQ^ix^i=(s^i)^TQ^is^i=0(xi)TQixi=(si)TQisi=0 and (Tixi)1(Tisi)1=∥(Tixi)2:n∥∥(Tisi)2:n∥(T^ix^i)_1(T^is^i)_1=\|(T^ix^i)_{2:n}\|\|(T^is^i)_{2:n}\|(Tixi)1​(Tisi)1​=∥(Tixi)2:n​∥∥(Tisi)2:n​∥ (p. 37).
  9. If (xi)Tsi=0(x^i)^Ts^i=0(xi)Tsi=0 and (Tixi)1,(Tisi)1≠0(T^ix^i)_1,(T^is^i)_1\ne0(Tixi)1​,(Tisi)1​=0, then (Tixi)2:n=α(Tisi)2:n(T^ix^i)_{2:n}=\alpha(T^is^i)_{2:n}(Tixi)2:n​=α(Tisi)2:n​ with α=−(Tixi)1/(Tisi)1\alpha=-(T^ix^i)_1/(T^is^i)_1α=−(Tixi)1​/(Tisi)1​, and (20) holds for block iii (p. 37).
  10. Lemma 3.2 ii) (p. 11): a point of N(1)\mathcal N(1)N(1) has XiSiei=μeiX^iS^ie^i=\mu e^iXiSiei=μei and τκ=μ\tau\kappa=\muτκ=μ.
  11. §6.1 (pp. 28–29): the starting point xi(0)=si(0)=Tie1ix^{i(0)}=s^{i(0)}=T^ie^i_1xi(0)=si(0)=Tie1i​, τ(0)=κ(0)=1\tau^{(0)}=\kappa^{(0)}=1τ(0)=κ(0)=1 lies in N(1)\mathcal N(1)N(1).

Significance

Lemma 3.1 is what makes a primal–dual method for conic quadratic problems possible in the familiar form: replacing XiSiei=0X^iS^ie^i=0XiSiei=0 by XiSiei=γμeiX^iS^ie^i=\gamma\mu e^iXiSiei=γμei gives the central path (21), and linearizing it gives the Newton system the paper analyses in §4. Lemma 3.2 ii) identifies N(1)\mathcal N(1)N(1) with that central path, and the §6.1 statement shows the algorithm starts on it. The arrow-head product XiSieiX^iS^ie^iXiSiei is the Jordan product of the Lorentz cone's Euclidean Jordan algebra, so the lemma is also the concrete, coordinate form of complementarity in that algebra (Alizadeh and Goldfarb, 2003).

The lemma is proved in the paper's Appendix and is classical; the mission's contribution is a machine-checked version. To our knowledge no proof assistant library contains complementarity for quadratic or rotated quadratic cones, the rotated-cone transformation, or the arrow-head matrix. The statements here are not yet proved anywhere in Lean.

Difficulty

The forward direction is an identity, (61). The converse is where the work is: xTs=0x^Ts=0xTs=0 is one scalar equation, yet it must force nin^ini equations per block. The argument needs a reverse Cauchy–Schwarz bound inside each quadratic cone, an equality-case analysis that splits on whether a leading coordinate vanishes, and the reduction of the rotated cone to the quadratic one through TTT. A block-by-block argument fails without first showing that each (xi)Tsi(x^i)^Ts^i(xi)Tsi is nonnegative, since only the sum is known to vanish. In Lean, the arithmetic of 1/21/\sqrt21/2​ in TTT and the index bookkeeping of v2:nv_{2:n}v2:n​ inside Fin n add their own friction.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin d → ℝ; the paper's x1x_1x1​ is index 0 and x2x_2x2​ is index 1, read through coord v r. The Euclidean tails are written out as sums, tailSq v 1 =∥v2:n∥2=\|v_{2:n}\|^2=∥v2:n​∥2 and tailSq v 2 =∥v3:n∥2=\|v_{3:n}\|^2=∥v3:n​∥2; Mathlib's norm on Fin d → ℝ is the sup norm and is never used. Points of KKK are stored block by block, x : (i : Fin k) → Fin (n i) → ℝ, with a cone kind kind i ∈ {nonneg, quad, rot} per block; xTsx^TsxTs is ∑ixi⋅si\sum_i x^i\cdot s^i∑i​xi⋅si, and the block-diagonal XXX, SSS are represented by their blocks. Tmat, Qmat, arrow and e1 are defined entrywise from (16)–(19) and p. 9.

Standing assumptions and additions:

  • The paper never states block dimensions; every theorem assumes WellFormed: ni=1n^i=1ni=1 for R+\mathbb R_+R+​, ni≥1n^i\ge1ni≥1 for KqK^qKq, ni≥2n^i\ge2ni≥2 for KrK^rKr (the rotated cone needs x1x_1x1​ and x2x_2x2​).
  • "x,s∈Kx,s\in Kx,s∈K" is taken literally; KKK is self-dual, so no separate dual cone is introduced.
  • The milestones 8 and 9 carry the page's case hypotheses (Tixi)1≠0(T^ix^i)_1\ne0(Tixi)1​=0, (Tisi)1≠0(T^is^i)_1\ne0(Tisi)1​=0.
  • The printed upper limit nnn in (61) is read as kkk; "(x; τ), (s; κ) ∈ N(1)" in Lemma 3.2 ii) is read as (x,τ,s,κ)∈N(1)(x,\tau,s,\kappa)\in\mathcal N(1)(x,τ,s,κ)∈N(1).

The goal is stated with arrow and Tmat, not with the unfolded vector ((Tixi)TTisi; (Tixi)1(Tisi)2:n+(Tisi)1(Tixi)2:n)((T^ix^i)^TT^is^i;\ (T^ix^i)_1(T^is^i)_{2:n}+(T^is^i)_1(T^ix^i)_{2:n})((Tixi)TTisi; (Tixi)1​(Tisi)2:n​+(Tisi)1​(Tixi)2:n​): replacing the arrow-head matrices by that vector, or dropping the rotated cone, would remove the content the lemma is about. Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, and reusable lemmas on tailSq (Cauchy–Schwarz for tails, its equality case) and on the arrow-head matrix.

Selected references

  • E. D. Andersen, C. Roos, T. Terlaky, On implementing a primal-dual interior-point method for conic quadratic optimization, Mathematical Programming 95 (2003). https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-002-0349-3
  • F. Alizadeh, D. Goldfarb, Second-order cone programming, Mathematical Programming 95 (2003), 3–51. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-002-0339-5
  • M. S. Lobo, L. Vandenberghe, S. Boyd, H. Lebret, Applications of second-order cone programming, Linear Algebra and its Applications 284 (1998), 193–228. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0024-3795(98)10032-0
  • Yu. E. Nesterov, M. J. Todd, Primal-dual interior-point methods for self-scaled cones, SIAM Journal on Optimization 8 (1998), 324–364. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623495290209
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 5: Nonquadratic Proximal Methods of Multipliers Converge to a Saddle PointResearch Paper

Motivation

The method of multipliers (augmented Lagrangian method) solves a constrained convex program by alternating an unconstrained minimization in the primal variables with an explicit update of the Lagrange multipliers. Rockafellar showed in 1976 that the classical quadratic version is the proximal point algorithm applied to the dual problem, and that a variant which also adds a proximal term in the primal variables, the proximal method of multipliers, is the proximal point algorithm applied to the saddle operator of the Lagrangian (Rockafellar 1976, Math. Oper. Res.). The primal proximal term makes each subproblem strictly convex, so its minimizer is unique, and the theory gives convergence of the primal and dual iterates together.

Penalty functions other than the quadratic one, such as the exponential multiplier method, were used in practice and studied by Bertsekas, Kort and Tseng, but their convergence theory was separate from the proximal point framework. Eckstein's 1993 paper (Math. Oper. Res. 18(1), 202–226) replaces the squared distance in the proximal point algorithm by the D-function of a Bregman function. Its §5 obtains the first nonquadratic generalization of the proximal method of multipliers and proves that it converges to a saddle point. This mission formalizes that theorem, Theorem 8.

  • 1967: Bregman introduces D-functions for convex feasibility (Bregman 1967).
  • 1976: Rockafellar proves convergence of the quadratic method of multipliers and the proximal method of multipliers via the proximal point algorithm.
  • 1990–1992: Censor and Zenios propose the proximal minimization algorithm with D-functions.
  • 1993: Eckstein proves convergence of the Bregman proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators (Theorem 1) and derives nonquadratic multiplier methods (Theorems 6–8).

Setting

A convex program of the form (10) is

min⁡f(x)subject togi(x)≤0 (i=1,…,m), x∈C,\min f(x)\quad\text{subject to}\quad g_i(x)\le0\ (i=1,\dots,m),\ x\in C,minf(x)subject togi​(x)≤0 (i=1,…,m), x∈C,

where C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn is closed, nonempty and convex, and f,g1,…,gm:Rn→(−∞,+∞]f,g_1,\dots,g_m:\mathbb R^n\to(-\infty,+\infty]f,g1​,…,gm​:Rn→(−∞,+∞] are proper lower semicontinuous convex functions, finite on CCC. Write g(x)=(g1(x),…,gm(x))g(x)=(g_1(x),\dots,g_m(x))g(x)=(g1​(x),…,gm​(x)) and Ω+‾={p∈Rm:p≥0}\overline{\Omega^+}=\{p\in\mathbb R^m:p\ge0\}Ω+={p∈Rm:p≥0}. The Lagrangian is l(x,p)=f(x)+∑ipigi(x)l(x,p)=f(x)+\sum_ip_ig_i(x)l(x,p)=f(x)+∑i​pi​gi​(x) for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, p≥0p\ge0p≥0; l(x,p)=−∞l(x,p)=-\inftyl(x,p)=−∞ for x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, p≱0p\not\ge0p≥0; l(x,p)=+∞l(x,p)=+\inftyl(x,p)=+∞ for x∉Cx\notin Cx∈/C. A saddle pair (x∗,p∗)(x^*,p^*)(x∗,p∗) satisfies l(x∗,p)≤l(x∗,p∗)≤l(x,p∗)l(x^*,p)\le l(x^*,p^*)\le l(x,p^*)l(x∗,p)≤l(x∗,p∗)≤l(x,p∗) for all x,px,px,p; the paper calls these optimal solution–Lagrange multiplier pairs. The saddle operator on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m is K(x,p)=∂xl(x,p)×(−∂^pl(x,p))K(x,p)=\partial_xl(x,p)\times(-\hat\partial_pl(x,p))K(x,p)=∂x​l(x,p)×(−∂^p​l(x,p)), where ∂x\partial_x∂x​ is the subdifferential of the convex function l(⋅,p)l(\cdot,p)l(⋅,p) and ∂^p\hat\partial_p∂^p​ the set of supergradients of the concave function l(x,⋅)l(x,\cdot)l(x,⋅).

For a differentiable hhh, the D-function is Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangleDh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩. A Bregman function with open zone SSS is a function h:S‾→Rh:\overline S\to\mathbb Rh:S→R, continuously differentiable on SSS, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, whose partial level sets of DhD_hDh​ are bounded, and which satisfies two sequential conditions relating Dh→0D_h\to0Dh​→0 to convergence (Definition 1). For h:Rm→Rh:\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb Rh:Rm→R, the monotone conjugate is h∗+(z)=sup⁡p≥0{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}h^{*+}(z)=\sup_{p\ge0}\{\langle p,z\rangle-h(p)\}h∗+(z)=supp≥0​{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}.

Given Bregman functions hxh_xhx​ on Rn\mathbb R^nRn and hph_php​ on Rm\mathbb R^mRm and step sizes ck>0c_k>0ck​>0, the nonquadratic proximal method of multipliers (12) is

xk+1=arg⁡min⁡x∈C{f(x)+1ckhp∗+(∇hp(pk)+ckg(x))+1ckDhx(x,xk)},pk+1=∇hp∗+(∇hp(pk)+ckg(xk+1)).x^{k+1}=\arg\min_{x\in C}\Big\{f(x)+\tfrac1{c_k}h_p^{*+}\big(\nabla h_p(p^k)+c_kg(x)\big)+\tfrac1{c_k}D_{h_x}(x,x^k)\Big\},\qquad p^{k+1}=\nabla h_p^{*+}\big(\nabla h_p(p^k)+c_kg(x^{k+1})\big).xk+1=argx∈Cmin​{f(x)+ck​1​hp∗+​(∇hp​(pk)+ck​g(x))+ck​1​Dhx​​(x,xk)},pk+1=∇hp∗+​(∇hp​(pk)+ck​g(xk+1)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

Assume ckc_kck​ positive and bounded away from zero, hxh_xhx​ a Bregman function with zone Sx⊇CS_x\supseteq CSx​⊇C, hph_php​ a Bregman function with zone Sp⊇Ω+‾S_p\supseteq\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊇Ω+ and im⁡∇hp=Rm\operatorname{im}\nabla h_p=\mathbb R^mim∇hp​=Rm, and {(xk,pk)}\{(x^k,p^k)\}{(xk,pk)} conforming to (12). Then

∃ saddle pair ⟹ (xk,pk)→(x∗,p∗) for some saddle pair (x∗,p∗),\exists\text{ saddle pair}\ \Longrightarrow\ (x^k,p^k)\to(x^*,p^*)\ \text{for some saddle pair }(x^*,p^*),∃ saddle pair ⟹ (xk,pk)→(x∗,p∗) for some saddle pair (x∗,p∗), ∄ saddle pair ⟹ {xk} or {pk} is unbounded.\nexists\text{ saddle pair}\ \Longrightarrow\ \{x^k\}\text{ or }\{p^k\}\text{ is unbounded}.∄ saddle pair ⟹ {xk} or {pk} is unbounded.

Existence clause

For the same step-size assumption, if in addition im⁡∇hx=Rn\operatorname{im}\nabla h_x=\mathbb R^nim∇hx​=Rn, a sequence conforming to (12) exists from every (x0,p0)∈C×Ω+‾(x^0,p^0)\in C\times\overline{\Omega^+}(x0,p0)∈C×Ω+. This is the third sentence of Theorem 8, stated as a separate item.

Milestones

Lemma 2 (four descriptions of h∗+h^{*+}h∗+, monotonicity), Lemma 3 (h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ finite and differentiable), Lemma A4 (a subdifferential chain rule), (14) (the xxx-step is a Bregman proximal step on ∂xl\partial_xl∂x​l), the formula ∂^pl(x,p)={g(x)}−∂δ+(p)\hat\partial_pl(x,p)=\{g(x)\}-\partial\delta^+(p)∂^p​l(x,p)={g(x)}−∂δ+(p), maximal monotonicity of KKK, saddle pairs === zeros of KKK, hx⊕hph_x\oplus h_phx​⊕hp​ is a Bregman function with zone Sx×Sp⊇dom⁡K‾S_x\times S_p\supseteq\overline{\operatorname{dom}K}Sx​×Sp​⊇domK, the identity (13), Theorem 1 restated on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m, Theorem 4 restated, and the existence clause.

Significance

Theorem 8 gives a family of primal–dual methods for convex programs, parametrized by two Bregman functions, each with the convergence guarantee of the quadratic proximal method of multipliers: convergence of both sequences to a saddle point when one exists, and divergence otherwise. Choosing hph_php​ to match the orthant (for instance entropy-like functions) yields exponential-type multiplier updates, and choosing hxh_xhx​ to match CCC adapts the primal regularization to the feasible set. The uniqueness of the primal minimizer, which the dual method of §4.2 lacks, is what allows convergence of the primal iterates without further assumptions.

The result is proved in the paper, with some steps asserted rather than proved (that hx⊕hph_x\oplus h_phx​⊕hp​ is a Bregman function; the maximality of KKK, cited from Rockafellar). No machine-checked proof of Theorem 8, of Theorem 1, or of the monotone-conjugate lemmas is known. A formalization would check the reduction of (12) to (13) carefully, including the extended-value conventions of the Lagrangian, and would provide reusable statements about Bregman functions on product spaces and about saddle operators of convex programs.

Difficulty

The reduction of Theorem 8 to Theorem 1 is short on the page but uses several nontrivial facts. The xxx-step is a constrained minimization of a composite function; turning its optimality condition into the inclusion (14) in ∂xl(xk+1,pk+1)\partial_xl(x^{k+1},p^{k+1})∂x​l(xk+1,pk+1) needs a chain rule for a nondecreasing differentiable outer function composed with extended-valued convex functions (Lemma A4), together with properties of the monotone conjugate (Lemmas 2 and 3) that rest on recession arguments in the Appendix. The ppp-step requires identifying ∂[hp∗+]∗\partial[h_p^{*+}]^*∂[hp∗+​]∗ with ∇hp+∂δ+\nabla h_p+\partial\delta^+∇hp​+∂δ+, which uses Sp⊇Ω+‾S_p\supseteq\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊇Ω+. Maximal monotonicity of KKK is a theorem about closed saddle functions, not a consequence of monotonicity alone. Theorem 1 itself is the main theorem of the paper and depends on all six conditions of Definition 1.

A natural first idea, applying Theorem 1 to KKK directly with an arbitrary Bregman function on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m, does not describe (12): the method is the specific instance h=hx⊕hph=h_x\oplus h_ph=hx​⊕hp​, and the identification of its steps with (∇h+ckK)−1(\nabla h+c_kK)^{-1}(∇h+ck​K)−1 is the content of (13).

Formalization scope

  • Rk\mathbb R^kRk is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin k); Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m is WithLp 2 (E n × E m), which carries the Euclidean inner product. The §2 objects (Bregman function, DhD_hDh​, runs of (3) written through the equivalent inclusion (4)) are defined over any finite-dimensional real inner product space so that Theorem 1 applies on Rn+m\mathbb R^{n+m}Rn+m.
  • Extended-real functions are EReal-valued; properness, convexity (of the epigraph) and subgradients use published definitions. hp∗+h_p^{*+}hp∗+​ is EReal-valued; the recursion (12) uses its real value and the gradient of that real function, which is exact because Lemma 3, a milestone, proves finiteness and differentiability.
  • "Optimal solution–Lagrange multiplier pair" is the saddle inequality, as identified on p. 220. "Converges to one" means both sequences converge, to the two components of one saddle pair; "unbounded" means the range is not bounded.
  • The xxx-step is a minimality predicate over CCC rather than arg⁡min⁡\arg\minargmin (equivalent; the minimizer is unique). A run requires x0∈Sxx^0\in S_xx0∈Sx​, not x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C, and pk∈Spp^k\in S_ppk∈Sp​, so that every gradient in (12) is defined.
  • Corrected typos: the page's "Sp⊃Ω+‾S_p\supset\overline{\Omega^+}Sp​⊃Ω+" is read as ⊇\supseteq⊇; in Lemma A4, "Lemma 5" is Lemma 2 and "f(x)∈Rnf(x)\in\mathbb R^nf(x)∈Rn" is Rm\mathbb R^mRm; Theorem 1's "monontone" is monotone; the supergradient formula's "δ+(p)\delta^+(p)δ+(p)" denotes ∂δ+(p)\partial\delta^+(p)∂δ+(p); the existence clause's extra parenthesis is dropped. In Lemma A4 a term yi∂fi(x0)y_i\partial f_i(x^0)yi​∂fi​(x0) with yi=0y_i=0yi​=0 is {0}\{0\}{0}, following the proof.
  • The §4.2 assumption that the dual functional is not everywhere −∞-\infty−∞ is not assumed; §5 does not use it.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal's hypotheses are satisfiable (with hx=hp=12∥⋅∥2h_x=h_p=\frac12\|\cdot\|^2hx​=hp​=21​∥⋅∥2, C=RC=\mathbb RC=R, f(x)=x2f(x)=x^2f(x)=x2, g1(x)=x−1g_1(x)=x-1g1​(x)=x−1 there is a saddle pair, checked in Lean), h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ is not replaced by a real supremum with junk values, and the saddle predicate quantifies over all of Rn×Rm\mathbb R^n\times\mathbb R^mRn×Rm.
  • Infrastructure a full development needs: Bregman functions on products, the monotone conjugate and its smoothness, a subdifferential sum and chain rule for extended-valued functions, maximal monotonicity of saddle operators, and Theorem 1. The monotone conjugate lemmas and Theorem 1 are shared with the companion missions of this series. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, including proofs of the restated Theorems 1 and 4 independent of the companion missions.

Selected references

  • J. Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 1993, 202–226. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.1.202
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Augmented Lagrangians and applications of the proximal point algorithm in convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 1(2), 1976, 97–116. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1.2.97
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • L. M. Bregman, The relaxation method of finding the common point of convex sets and its application to the solution of problems in convex programming, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 7(3), 1967, 200–217. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(67)90040-7
  • Y. Censor and S. A. Zenios, Proximal minimization algorithm with D-functions, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 73(3), 1992, 451–464. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00940051
18 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management 2: For a Compact Convex Set of Discrete Distributions, Worst-Case CVaR Equals min_α max_π G_β(x, α, π)Research Paper

Motivation

Conditional value-at-risk (CVaR) is the standard coherent measure of tail risk in portfolio selection and risk-averse optimization: for a confidence level β\betaβ it is, roughly, the expected loss in the worst (1−β)(1-\beta)(1−β) fraction of outcomes. Its practical appeal comes from the representation of Rockafellar and Uryasev (2000, 2002), which writes CVaR as the minimum over a scalar threshold α\alphaα of a convex function, so that minimizing CVaR over decisions becomes a single convex (often linear) program.

That representation presupposes that the distribution of the uncertain data is known exactly. In practice the scenario probabilities are estimated, and decisions that are optimal for the estimate can perform poorly under a nearby distribution. Zhu and Fukushima (Oper. Res. 57(5), 2009) study the worst-case CVaR: the largest CVaR over a set of distributions that the decision maker considers plausible. For a finite scenario model they show (Theorem 2) that when the plausible set of probability vectors is compact and convex, the worst-case CVaR again has a min–max representation in the threshold α\alphaα. This is what makes worst-case CVaR minimization tractable: under box uncertainty it becomes a linear program and under ellipsoidal uncertainty a second-order cone program (§2.2.1–2.2.2 of the paper).

Setting

A decision x∈Rnx \in \mathbb R^nx∈Rn incurs the loss f(x,y)f(x,y)f(x,y), where y∈Rmy \in \mathbb R^my∈Rm is random. In the discrete model yyy takes the finitely many values y[1],…,y[S]y_{[1]},\dots,y_{[S]}y[1]​,…,y[S]​, the scenarios, with probabilities π1,…,πS\pi_1,\dots,\pi_Sπ1​,…,πS​, where πk≥0\pi_k \ge 0πk​≥0 and ∑kπk=1\sum_k \pi_k = 1∑k​πk​=1. Fix a confidence level 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 and write [t]+=max⁡{t,0}[t]^+ = \max\{t,0\}[t]+=max{t,0}. The Rockafellar–Uryasev function for the distribution π\piπ is

Gβ(x,α,π)=α+11−β∑k=1Sπk [f(x,y[k])−α]+,α∈R,G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) = \alpha + \frac{1}{1-\beta}\sum_{k=1}^S \pi_k\,[f(x,y_{[k]})-\alpha]^+, \qquad \alpha\in\mathbb R,Gβ​(x,α,π)=α+1−β1​k=1∑S​πk​[f(x,y[k]​)−α]+,α∈R,

and the CVaR of the loss at xxx under π\piπ is

CVaRβ(x,π)=min⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π).\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi).CVaRβ​(x,π)=α∈Rmin​Gβ​(x,α,π).

The distribution is not known; it is only known to lie in an ambiguity set Pπ⊆RS\mathcal P_\pi \subseteq \mathbb R^SPπ​⊆RS of probability vectors. The worst-case CVaR at xxx is

WCVaRβ(x)=sup⁡π∈PπCVaRβ(x,π)=sup⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π).\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x) = \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi) = \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi).WCVaRβ​(x)=π∈Pπ​sup​CVaRβ​(x,π)=π∈Pπ​sup​α∈Rmin​Gβ​(x,α,π).

In the Lean development these objects are WorstCaseCVaR.Discrete.G, cvar and wcvar, with the scenarios given as ys : Fin S → (Fin m → ℝ) and Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ as a set P of vectors Fin S → ℝ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 1159)

If Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ is a nonempty compact convex set of probability vectors, then for each xxx

WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈Rmax⁡π∈PπGβ(x,α,π),\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi),WCVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​π∈Pπ​max​Gβ​(x,α,π),

with the inner maximum attained for every α\alphaα and the outer minimum attained at some α0\alpha_0α0​. The statement fixes no constants and no particular ambiguity set.

Milestones (the steps of the paper's proof, p. 1167)

  1. Gβ(x,α,π)G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)Gβ​(x,α,π) is convex in α\alphaα for each probability vector π\piπ and affine in π\piπ for each α\alphaα.
  2. There is one nonempty closed bounded interval A\mathcal AA such that, for every π∈Pπ\pi\in\mathcal P_\piπ∈Pπ​, min⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π)=min⁡α∈AGβ(x,α,π)\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) = \min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A} G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)minα∈R​Gβ​(x,α,π)=minα∈A​Gβ​(x,α,π).
  3. Lemma 1 (p. 1157, Ky Fan's minimax theorem): for convex–concave, suitably semicontinuous ϕ\phiϕ on a product of nonempty compact convex sets, min⁡xmax⁡yϕ=max⁡ymin⁡xϕ\min_x\max_y\phi = \max_y\min_x\phiminx​maxy​ϕ=maxy​minx​ϕ.
  4. Lemma 1 on A×Pπ\mathcal A\times\mathcal P_\piA×Pπ​: max⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈AGβ=min⁡α∈Amax⁡π∈PπGβ\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A}G_\beta = \min_{\alpha\in\mathcal A}\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}G_\betamaxπ∈Pπ​​minα∈A​Gβ​=minα∈A​maxπ∈Pπ​​Gβ​.
  5. The min-max inequality inf⁡α∈Rsup⁡π∈PπGβ(x,α,π)≥sup⁡π∈Pπmin⁡α∈RGβ(x,α,π)\inf_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi) \ge \sup_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}G_\beta(x,\alpha,\pi)infα∈R​supπ∈Pπ​​Gβ​(x,α,π)≥supπ∈Pπ​​minα∈R​Gβ​(x,α,π).

Significance

Theorem 2 converts a supremum over distributions of a minimum over thresholds into a minimum over thresholds of a worst case of a function that is affine in π\piπ. Minimizing WCVaRβ(x)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)WCVaRβ​(x) over decisions xxx is therefore the single minimization problem (16)–(20) of the paper in the variables (x,u,α,θ)(x,u,\alpha,\theta)(x,u,α,θ), whose only nonstandard constraint is max⁡π∈Pπ(α+11−βπTu)≤θ\max_{\pi\in\mathcal P_\pi}(\alpha+\frac{1}{1-\beta}\pi^Tu)\le\thetamaxπ∈Pπ​​(α+1−β1​πTu)≤θ. For box and ellipsoidal ambiguity sets that constraint is dualized into linear or conic constraints, which gives the robust portfolio models of §§2.2.1–3 of the paper. The same exchange of sup⁡π\sup_\pisupπ​ and min⁡α\min_\alphaminα​ underlies many later distributionally robust CVaR models.

The result is proved in the paper (appendix, p. 1167) and is not open. The mission produces a machine-checked proof of it, which to our knowledge does not exist. Mathlib contains Sion's minimax theorem (Sion.exists_isSaddlePointOn), which covers Lemma 1; what is missing is the CVaR-specific part: the convexity of GβG_\betaGβ​ in α\alphaα, the reduction of the threshold to a compact interval uniform over Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​, and the passage from the compact interval back to all of R\mathbb RR.

Difficulty

The obvious approach applies a minimax theorem directly to GβG_\betaGβ​ on R×Pπ\mathbb R\times\mathcal P_\piR×Pπ​. That fails because R\mathbb RR is not compact, and minimax equalities on a noncompact factor can fail; the threshold must first be confined to a bounded interval, and the interval must work for every π∈Pπ\pi\in\mathcal P_\piπ∈Pπ​ simultaneously. After the exchange on the interval, the minimum over the interval has to be identified with the infimum over all of R\mathbb RR, which needs the min-max inequality on the unrestricted line. A second subtlety is attainment: every "min" and "max" in the statement is a claim that an extremum exists, and in the real-valued formalization each must be exhibited rather than read off from a supremum.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in the Lean statements:

  • Scenarios are indexed zero-based by Fin S; probability vectors are elements of stdSimplex ℝ (Fin S).
  • The confidence level satisfies 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 in every statement (the paper says only that β\betaβ is a confidence level, usually above 0.90.90.9).
  • CVaRβ(x,π)\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x,\pi)CVaRβ​(x,π) is defined as the paper does for discrete distributions, as the minimum of Gβ(x,⋅,π)G_\beta(x,\cdot,\pi)Gβ​(x,⋅,π), encoded as the real infimum of its values; WCVaRβ(x)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)WCVaRβ​(x) is the real supremum of the image of Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​. Both are true infima and suprema under the hypotheses carried by every theorem.
  • Theorem 2's hypothesis "Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ is a compact convex set" is completed by two standing assumptions of §2.2: Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ consists of probability vectors, and it is nonempty. Without the first, Gβ(x,⋅,π)G_\beta(x,\cdot,\pi)Gβ​(x,⋅,π) can be unbounded below and the real infimum returns a junk value; without the second the supremum is over the empty set.
  • Lemma 1 is stated with lower semicontinuity in xxx and upper semicontinuity in yyy, which the paper omits and which are needed for the extrema to exist; its conclusion is a saddle point, equivalent to the attained min–max equality.
  • In the goal, the right-hand side exhibits an explicit minimizer α0\alpha_0α0​ and the inner maximum is shown to be attained; neither is replaced by a bare infimum or supremum.

No vacuous version of the goal is admissible: the ambiguity set must be nonempty and consist of probability vectors, and the minimum over α\alphaα must be witnessed.

The development needs only finite sums, convexity on R\mathbb RR and on the simplex, compactness of Pπ\mathcal P_\piPπ​ and of closed intervals, and Mathlib's minimax theorem. The reduction to a bounded interval and the min-max inequality are reusable for other finite-scenario CVaR results. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative proofs of the goal that avoid the interval reduction.

Selected references

  • S. Zhu and M. Fukushima, Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management, Operations Research 57(5):1155–1168, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1080.0684
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Optimization of Conditional Value-at-Risk, Journal of Risk 2(3):21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Conditional Value-at-Risk for General Loss Distributions, Journal of Banking & Finance 26(7):1443–1471, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4266(02)00271-6
  • K. Fan, Minimax Theorems, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 39(1):42–47, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.39.1.42
  • M. Sion, On General Minimax Theorems, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 8(1):171–176, 1958. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1958.8.171
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management 1: Under Mixture Distribution Uncertainty, Worst-Case CVaR Equals the Minimum over α of max_i F^i_β(x, α)Research Paper

Motivation

Conditional value-at-risk (CVaR) is the standard coherent measure of tail risk in portfolio selection, insurance and stochastic programming. Its practical appeal comes from a variational formula of Rockafellar and Uryasev (J. Risk 2000; J. Banking Finance 2002): CVaR at level β\betaβ is the minimum over a scalar α\alphaα of a convex function, so that minimizing CVaR over decisions becomes a single convex program, a linear program when the distribution is given by scenarios.

The formula needs the distribution of the random returns, and in practice that distribution is estimated and uncertain. Zhu and Fukushima (Oper. Res. 57(5), 2009) introduce the worst-case CVaR: the supremum of CVaR over a set P\mathcal PP of candidate distributions. They show it is again a coherent risk measure and that, for several natural choices of P\mathcal PP, minimizing it remains a tractable convex program. This mission formalizes the first of these results, for P\mathcal PP the set of all mixtures of finitely many given distributions, a model used in robust statistics and in finance to describe returns under several market regimes.

Setting

A decision x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn and a random vector y∈Rmy\in\mathbb R^my∈Rm determine a loss f(x,y)∈Rf(x,y)\in\mathbb Rf(x,y)∈R. A confidence level β\betaβ satisfies 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 (in applications β≥0.9\beta\ge0.9β≥0.9). Write [t]+=max⁡{t,0}[t]^+=\max\{t,0\}[t]+=max{t,0}.

For a probability distribution PPP of yyy under which f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) is integrable, the Rockafellar–Uryasev function is

Fβ(x,α)=α+11−β∫Rm[f(x,y)−α]+ dP(y),α∈R,(1)F_\beta(x,\alpha)=\alpha+\frac1{1-\beta}\int_{\mathbb R^m}[f(x,y)-\alpha]^+\,dP(y),\qquad\alpha\in\mathbb R, \tag{1}Fβ​(x,α)=α+1−β1​∫Rm​[f(x,y)−α]+dP(y),α∈R,(1)

and CVaR is its minimum over α\alphaα:

CVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈RFβ(x,α).(2)\mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}F_\beta(x,\alpha). \tag{2}CVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​Fβ​(x,α).(2)

Fix l≥1l\ge1l≥1 likelihood distributions P1,…,PlP^1,\dots,P^lP1,…,Pl on Rm\mathbb R^mRm and let Λ={λ∈Rl:λi≥0, ∑iλi=1}\Lambda=\{\lambda\in\mathbb R^l:\lambda_i\ge0,\ \sum_i\lambda_i=1\}Λ={λ∈Rl:λi​≥0, ∑i​λi​=1} be the probability simplex. The ambiguity set is the set of mixtures

PM={∑i=1lλiPi: λ∈Λ},\mathcal P_M=\Big\{\textstyle\sum_{i=1}^l\lambda_iP^i:\ \lambda\in\Lambda\Big\},PM​={∑i=1l​λi​Pi: λ∈Λ},

and the worst-case CVaR of xxx is

WCVaRβ(x)=sup⁡λ∈Λ CVaRβ(x)  under  ∑iλiPi.(3)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\sup_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\ \mathrm{CVaR}_\beta(x)\ \text{ under }\ \textstyle\sum_i\lambda_iP^i. \tag{3}WCVaRβ​(x)=λ∈Λsup​ CVaRβ​(x)  under  ∑i​λi​Pi.(3)

Write Fβi(x,α)F^i_\beta(x,\alpha)Fβi​(x,α) for the function (1) with P=PiP=P^iP=Pi, FβL(x,α)=max⁡i∈LFβi(x,α)F^{\mathcal L}_\beta(x,\alpha)=\max_{i\in\mathcal L}F^i_\beta(x,\alpha)FβL​(x,α)=maxi∈L​Fβi​(x,α) with L={1,…,l}\mathcal L=\{1,\dots,l\}L={1,…,l}, and Hβ(x,α,λ)H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)Hβ​(x,α,λ) for the function (1) of the mixture ∑iλiPi\sum_i\lambda_iP^i∑i​λi​Pi.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

For every xxx with f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) integrable under every PiP^iPi,

WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈R max⁡i∈LFβi(x,α),\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\ \max_{i\in\mathcal L}F^i_\beta(x,\alpha),WCVaRβ​(x)=α∈Rmin​ i∈Lmax​Fβi​(x,α),

with the minimum attained. The supremum over infinitely many distributions on the left becomes a minimum of the pointwise maximum of lll functions on the right.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's appendix proof (pp. 1166–1167) in order:

  1. (53): Hβ(x,α,λ)=∑iλiFβi(x,α)H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)=\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)Hβ​(x,α,λ)=∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α) for λ∈Λ\lambda\in\Lambdaλ∈Λ.
  2. (54): WCVaRβ(x)=max⁡λ∈Λmin⁡αHβ(x,α,λ)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\min_{\alpha}H_\beta(x,\alpha,\lambda)WCVaRβ​(x)=maxλ∈Λ​minα​Hβ​(x,α,λ), both extrema attained.
  3. The minimizer set of Fβ(x,⋅)F_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβ​(x,⋅) is a nonempty closed bounded interval [α‾∗,α‾∗][\underline\alpha^*,\overline\alpha^*][α​∗,α∗].
  4. Minimizers of a nonnegative combination of two convex functions on R\mathbb RR lie between the extreme endpoints of their minimizer intervals.
  5. Every minimizer of Hβ(x,⋅,λ)H_\beta(x,\cdot,\lambda)Hβ​(x,⋅,λ) lies in A=[min⁡iα‾i∗,max⁡iα‾i∗]\mathcal A=[\min_i\underline\alpha^*_i,\max_i\overline\alpha^*_i]A=[mini​α​i∗​,maxi​αi∗​], and the minimum over R\mathbb RR is attained in A\mathcal AA.
  6. Lemma 1, the minimax equality for convex–concave functions on compact convex sets.
  7. (55): max⁡λmin⁡RHβ=max⁡λmin⁡AHβ=min⁡Amax⁡λHβ\max_\lambda\min_{\mathbb R}H_\beta=\max_\lambda\min_{\mathcal A}H_\beta=\min_{\mathcal A}\max_\lambda H_\betamaxλ​minR​Hβ​=maxλ​minA​Hβ​=minA​maxλ​Hβ​.
  8. (56)–(57): WCVaRβ(x)=min⁡α∈Rmax⁡λ∈Λ∑iλiFβi(x,α)\mathrm{WCVaR}_\beta(x)=\min_{\alpha\in\mathbb R}\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)WCVaRβ​(x)=minα∈R​maxλ∈Λ​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α).
  9. (58)–(59): max⁡λ∈Λ∑iλiFβi(x,α)=max⁡iFβi(x,α)\max_{\lambda\in\Lambda}\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)=\max_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)maxλ∈Λ​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α)=maxi​Fβi​(x,α).

An additional item states Corollary 1: (x∗,α∗)(x^*,\alpha^*)(x∗,α∗) minimizes FβLF^{\mathcal L}_\betaFβL​ over X×R\mathcal X\times\mathbb RX×R exactly when x∗x^*x∗ minimizes WCVaRβ\mathrm{WCVaR}_\betaWCVaRβ​ over X\mathcal XX and α∗\alpha^*α∗ minimizes FβL(x∗,⋅)F^{\mathcal L}_\beta(x^*,\cdot)FβL​(x∗,⋅).

Significance

The result. Theorem 1 makes worst-case CVaR under mixture uncertainty no harder to optimize than ordinary CVaR. Since each FβiF^i_\betaFβi​ is jointly convex in (x,α)(x,\alpha)(x,α) when fff is convex in xxx, FβLF^{\mathcal L}_\betaFβL​ is convex, and Corollary 1 turns robust CVaR minimization into one convex program in (x,α)(x,\alpha)(x,α); with sampled scenarios it is a linear program (the paper's (10)–(15)). It is the starting point for the paper's robust portfolio models (§3), whose ambiguity sets are mixtures of a few estimated return distributions.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; no machine-checked version exists. A formal proof contributes a measure-theoretic treatment of the Rockafellar–Uryasev function for arbitrary distributions (the paper argues with densities and appeals to Remark 1 for the general case), a reusable statement that the minimizer set of FβF_\betaFβ​ is a compact interval, and a worked instance of the minimax theorem in Mathlib (Sion) applied to a problem with an unbounded variable.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is to exchange sup⁡λ\sup_\lambdasupλ​ and min⁡α\min_\alphaminα​ in sup⁡λmin⁡α∑iλiFβi(x,α)\sup_\lambda\min_\alpha\sum_i\lambda_iF^i_\beta(x,\alpha)supλ​minα​∑i​λi​Fβi​(x,α), since the function is convex in α\alphaα and affine in λ\lambdaλ. Minimax theorems for this exchange need compactness of one of the two sets, and the variable α\alphaα ranges over all of R\mathbb RR. The step that has to be supplied is a localization: all minimizers in α\alphaα, for every λ\lambdaλ at once, lie in one compact interval A\mathcal AA determined by the minimizer sets of the components. This in turn requires knowing that each Fβi(x,⋅)F^i_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβi​(x,⋅) has a nonempty bounded minimizer set, which uses 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1 and integrability of the loss: at β=0\beta=0β=0 the minimizer set can be a half-line and the localization fails. A second point is attainment: the outer supremum over Λ\LambdaΛ is a maximum only because the inner minimum depends continuously on λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization scope

  • Distributions are probability measures on Fin m → ℝ (not densities); Remark 1 of the paper extends all results to general distributions, and a density is a special case. Decisions are Fin n → ℝ, the loss is f : (Fin n → ℝ) → (Fin m → ℝ) → ℝ, and the likelihood distributions are P : Fin l → Measure (Fin m → ℝ) with indices zero-based and [NeZero l].
  • Every theorem assumes 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, that each PiP^iPi is a probability measure, and that f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) is integrable under each PiP^iPi (the paper's E∣f(x,y)∣<∞E|f(x,y)|<\inftyE∣f(x,y)∣<∞).
  • CVaR is defined by (2) as the infimum of the values of Fβ(x,⋅)F_\beta(x,\cdot)Fβ​(x,⋅); the tail-mean definition and the Rockafellar–Uryasev identity between the two are not part of the mission. The mixture is the finite sum of measures ∑iλiPi\sum_i\lambda_iP^i∑i​λi​Pi, Λ\LambdaΛ is Mathlib's stdSimplex, and WCVaR is the supremum of the image of Λ\LambdaΛ.
  • Every min and max in the paper is stated as attained, with an explicit minimizer or as IsGreatest/IsLeast; no real sInf or sSup is evaluated on an empty or unbounded set, so no statement can hold through Lean's junk value 000.
  • Lemma 1 is stated with lower semicontinuity in xxx and upper semicontinuity in yyy, which the printed statement omits and without which the extrema need not exist.
  • The definitions FβF_\betaFβ​, CVaR, mixture and WCVaR are reusable for any risk-measure development; the interval property of arg⁡min⁡Fβ\arg\min F_\betaargminFβ​ is of independent use. Proofs of any milestone, and lemmas on the Rockafellar–Uryasev function for general measures, are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Zhu and M. Fukushima, Worst-Case Conditional Value-at-Risk with Application to Robust Portfolio Management, Operations Research 57(5):1155–1168, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1080.0684
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Optimization of conditional value-at-risk, Journal of Risk 2(3):21–41, 2000. https://doi.org/10.21314/JOR.2000.038
  • R. T. Rockafellar and S. Uryasev, Conditional value-at-risk for general loss distributions, Journal of Banking & Finance 26(7):1443–1471, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4266(02)00271-6
  • K. Fan, Minimax theorems, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 39(1):42–47, 1953. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.39.1.42
  • P. Artzner, F. Delbaen, J.-M. Eber and D. Heath, Coherent measures of risk, Mathematical Finance 9(3):203–228, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-9965.00068
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Some Theoretical Aspects of Road Traffic Research III: Minimum Average Journey Time on Alternative Routes — Equal Marginal Times ε and the Closed Forms (32)–(33)Research Paper

Motivation

J. G. Wardrop's 1952 paper Some theoretical aspects of road traffic research (DOI 10.1680/ipeds.1952.11259) introduced the two criteria that still organise traffic assignment. When a flow of traffic can choose between several routes from one origin to one destination, the paper (p. 345) considers two ways the traffic might divide:

  1. the journey times on all the routes actually used are equal, and less than those that a single vehicle would experience on any unused route;
  2. the average journey time is a minimum.

The first is now called Wardrop's first principle, or user equilibrium: no driver can shorten their trip by switching route. The second, Wardrop's second principle, is the system optimum: it "minimizes the vehicle-hours spent on the journey". The gap between the two is the quantity later studied as the price of anarchy of selfish routing (Roughgarden and Tardos, J. ACM 2002), and the marginal-cost characterisation of the system optimum underlies congestion pricing (Beckmann, McGuire and Winsten, Studies in the Economics of Transportation, 1956).

This mission formalizes the paper's solution of criterion (2) on parallel routes, section (2) Minimum Average Time, pp. 345–347. Mission II of the same series treats criterion (1) on the same model.

Setting

A total additional flow QQQ is divided among DDD alternative routes i=1,…,Di = 1, \dots, Di=1,…,D. Route iii carries an additional flow qiq_iqi​ and has journey time, equation (22),

ti(qi)=bi1−qi/pi,t_i(q_i) = \frac{b_i}{1 - q_i/p_i},ti​(qi​)=1−qi​/pi​bi​​,

where bi>0b_i > 0bi​>0 is the journey time on route iii with no additional flow and pi>0p_i > 0pi​>0 is the additional flow at which its speed would fall to zero (routeTime b p i x). A feasible split of QQQ is a vector qqq with 0≤qi<pi0 \le q_i < p_i0≤qi​<pi​ for every iii and ∑iqi=Q\sum_i q_i = Q∑i​qi​=Q (IsFeasible p Q q).

The number of additional vehicles on route iii at an instant is zi=qitiz_i = q_i t_izi​=qi​ti​, and Z=∑iziZ = \sum_i z_iZ=∑i​zi​ (totalExtra b p q). The average journey time is, equations (25)–(26),

T=∑i=1DqitiQ=ZQT = \sum_{i=1}^D \frac{q_i t_i}{Q} = \frac{Z}{Q}T=i=1∑D​Qqi​ti​​=QZ​

(avgTime b p Q q). Criterion (2) asks for a feasible split qqq with T(q)≤T(z)T(q) \le T(z)T(q)≤T(z) for every feasible split zzz (IsMinAvgTime b p Q q).

The marginal journey time of route iii is d(qiti)/dqid(q_i t_i)/dq_id(qi​ti​)/dqi​, the rate at which ZZZ grows when flow is added to that route. For a threshold ε\varepsilonε, U(ε)={i:bi<ε}U(\varepsilon) = \{i : b_i < \varepsilon\}U(ε)={i:bi​<ε} (usedSet b ε) is the set of routes whose marginal time at zero flow lies below ε\varepsilonε; with the routes labelled so that b1<⋯<bDb_1 < \dots < b_Db1​<⋯<bD​ it is the paper's "first jjj routes".

Formalization targets

Goal: the closed forms (32)–(33)

For bi,pi>0b_i, p_i > 0bi​,pi​>0 and 0<Q<∑ipi0 < Q < \sum_i p_i0<Q<∑i​pi​, every split qqq minimizing TTT admits a threshold ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 with ∑i∈Upi>Q\sum_{i \in U} p_i > Q∑i∈U​pi​>Q, where U=U(ε)U = U(\varepsilon)U=U(ε), such that

qh={ph{1−(∑i∈Upi−Q)bh∑i∈Upibi},bh<ε,0,otherwise,T=1Q{(∑i∈Upibi)2∑i∈Upi−Q−∑i∈Upibi}.q_h = \begin{cases} p_h\left\{1 - \dfrac{\left(\sum_{i\in U} p_i - Q\right)\sqrt{b_h}}{\sum_{i\in U} p_i\sqrt{b_i}}\right\}, & b_h < \varepsilon,\\[1ex] 0, & \text{otherwise,}\end{cases} \qquad T = \frac1Q\left\{\frac{\left(\sum_{i\in U} p_i\sqrt{b_i}\right)^2}{\sum_{i\in U} p_i - Q} - \sum_{i\in U} p_i b_i\right\}.qh​=⎩⎨⎧​ph​{1−∑i∈U​pi​bi​​(∑i∈U​pi​−Q)bh​​​},0,​bh​<ε,otherwise,​T=Q1​{∑i∈U​pi​−Q(∑i∈U​pi​bi​​)2​−i∈U∑​pi​bi​}.

Milestones

  1. (29)–(30): d(qiti)/dqi=bi/(1−qi/pi)2d(q_i t_i)/dq_i = b_i/(1 - q_i/p_i)^2d(qi​ti​)/dqi​=bi​/(1−qi​/pi​)2, equal to bib_ibi​ at qi=0q_i = 0qi​=0.
  2. (27)–(28): at a minimum, all routes in use have the same marginal time ε\varepsilonε.
  3. A route jjj with bj≥εb_j \ge \varepsilonbj​≥ε is not used.
  4. The routes in use are exactly those with bi<εb_i < \varepsilonbi​<ε, and on them 1−qi/pi=bi/ε1 - q_i/p_i = \sqrt{b_i/\varepsilon}1−qi​/pi​=bi​/ε​.
  5. (31): ∑i∈Upi−Q=∑i∈Upibi/ε\sum_{i\in U} p_i - Q = \sum_{i\in U} p_i\sqrt{b_i/\varepsilon}∑i∈U​pi​−Q=∑i∈U​pi​bi​/ε​.

A companion theorem states that a minimizing split exists whenever 0<Q<∑ipi0 < Q < \sum_i p_i0<Q<∑i​pi​.

Significance

The closed forms give the system-optimal assignment on parallel routes with the travel-time law (22) explicitly: which routes carry traffic, how much, and the resulting average time. Together with the equal-times solution (23)–(24) of mission II they quantify, for this model, how much average time selfish route choice costs; the paper's Fig. 8 compares the two numerically and finds the difference small in its example. The marginal-time conditions (27)–(28) are the parallel-route instance of the general statement that a system optimum is an equilibrium with respect to marginal costs.

The derivation on pp. 346–347 is a first-order argument that the paper does not make rigorous: it assumes a minimizer exists, that it satisfies the stationarity condition, and leaves (32)–(33) to "a few lines of algebra". This mission produces the rigorous version, including existence. No machine-checked statement of (27)–(33) is on the platform; the related platform items on Wardrop equilibria concern the Beckmann potential and atomic congestion games, not the system optimum of this model.

Difficulty

The stationarity condition (27) comes from moving an infinitesimal flow between two routes in use. Turning this into a theorem needs the one-sided version at unused routes, since qj=0q_j = 0qj​=0 is a boundary point and the condition there is an inequality, and needs the constraint ∑iqi=Q\sum_i q_i = Q∑i​qi​=Q to be preserved by the perturbation. The step "only the first jjj routes will be in use" is the converse direction: a route with bi<εb_i < \varepsilonbi​<ε that carries no flow must be shown to contradict minimality, not just to violate the equal-marginals equation.

Existence is not a compactness argument on a closed set: the feasible set is open in the direction qi→piq_i \to p_iqi​→pi​, where qiti→∞q_i t_i \to \inftyqi​ti​→∞, and that coercivity has to be used. The algebra from (31) to (32)–(33) is routine once the set UUU and the value of ε\varepsilonε are fixed.

Formalization scope

Routes are indexed by Fin D; all quantities are real. The standing hypotheses are bi>0b_i > 0bi​>0, pi>0p_i > 0pi​>0, 0<Q0 < Q0<Q and Q<∑ipiQ < \sum_i p_iQ<∑i​pi​; without the last the feasible set is empty and every statement about a minimizer is vacuous, and with Q≤0Q \le 0Q≤0 the average time Z/QZ/QZ/Q is undefined. Feasibility requires qi<piq_i < p_iqi​<pi​, of the minimizer and of every competitor: at qi=piq_i = p_iqi​=pi​ Lean evaluates bi/0b_i/0bi​/0 as 000, which would let a "minimizer" place flow at capacity for free. The paper's labelling b1<⋯<bDb_1 < \dots < b_Db1​<⋯<bD​ is not assumed; "the first jjj routes" is U(ε)U(\varepsilon)U(ε). Marginal times are written in the closed form (29), and milestone 1 identifies that form with the derivative via HasDerivAt. Minimality is stated for TTT, the paper's criterion, not for ZZZ.

Corrected slip. The paper prints the denominator of (33) as ∑i=1jpibi\sum_{i=1}^j p_i b_i∑i=1j​pi​bi​. The formalization uses ∑i=1jpibi\sum_{i=1}^j p_i\sqrt{b_i}∑i=1j​pi​bi​​: from (31), 1/ε=(∑pi−Q)/∑pibi1/\sqrt\varepsilon = (\sum p_i - Q)/\sum p_i\sqrt{b_i}1/ε​=(∑pi​−Q)/∑pi​bi​​, and qh=ph(1−bh/ε)q_h = p_h(1 - \sqrt{b_h/\varepsilon})qh​=ph​(1−bh​/ε​). The printed form is not dimensionally consistent and gives wrong flows, e.g. for b=(4,9)b = (4, 9)b=(4,9), p=(10,10)p = (10, 10)p=(10,10), Q=35/3Q = 35/3Q=35/3. Equation (32) is correct as printed.

The goal cannot be satisfied trivially: the threshold ε\varepsilonε is existential and the flows and TTT are pinned to explicit formulas, and the companion existence theorem shows the hypothesis IsMinAvgTime is met for every admissible QQQ. The route time and feasible split come from the shared WardropTraffic.EqualTimes.Setting definition; this mission adds the total and average time and criterion (2). Proofs of any item, including the existence theorem and a uniqueness statement (the objective is strictly convex), are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. G. Wardrop, Some theoretical aspects of road traffic research, Proc. Instn Civ. Engrs Part II 1 (1952), 325–362. https://doi.org/10.1680/ipeds.1952.11259
  • M. Beckmann, C. B. McGuire, C. B. Winsten, Studies in the Economics of Transportation, Yale University Press, 1956.
  • T. Roughgarden, É. Tardos, How bad is selfish routing?, J. ACM 49(2) (2002), 236–259. https://doi.org/10.1145/506147.506153
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A D.C. Optimization Algorithm for Solving the Trust-Region Subproblem I: A Point x Solves the D.C. Program min(g − h) if and only if ∂_εh(x) ⊂ ∂_εg(x) for Every ε > 0Research Paper

Motivation

A d.c. program minimizes a difference of two convex functions. Many nonconvex problems of practical interest have this form: every function with a locally Lipschitz gradient on Rn\mathbb R^nRn is d.c., the class is closed under finite sums, products and finite suprema, and constrained problems enter through indicator functions. Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An (SIAM J. Optim. 8 (1998)) use this structure to build the DCA, an algorithm for the trust-region subproblem min⁡{12x⊤Ax+b⊤x:∥x∥≤r}\min\{\tfrac12 x^\top Ax+b^\top x:\|x\|\le r\}min{21​x⊤Ax+b⊤x:∥x∥≤r}, a basic step of trust-region methods in nonlinear optimization. The algorithm rests on a duality theory for d.c. programs, which §3.1 of the paper sets out. This mission is the global half of that theory.

Timeline.

  • 1978–1979: J. F. Toland introduces the duality inf⁡(g−h)=inf⁡(h∗−g∗)\inf(g-h)=\inf(h^*-g^*)inf(g−h)=inf(h∗−g∗) and the inclusions between primal and dual solution sets, in a general setting of linear spaces in separating duality (J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66 (1978); Bull. Soc. Math. France, Mémoire 60 (1979), pp. 177–183, numdam).
  • 1988: J.-B. Hiriart-Urruty proves that xxx minimizes g−hg-hg−h if and only if ∂εh(x)⊂∂εg(x)\partial_\varepsilon h(x)\subset\partial_\varepsilon g(x)∂ε​h(x)⊂∂ε​g(x) for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, through the behaviour of the ε\varepsilonε-directional derivative as a function of ε\varepsilonε (From convex optimization to non convex optimization. Part I, in Nonsmooth Optimization and Related Topics, Plenum, 1988; reference [9] of the paper). The same year Pham Dinh and Elbernoussi introduce the DCA on the basis of d.c. duality (reference [23]).
  • 1998: Pham Dinh and Le Thi give a short proof of Hiriart-Urruty's condition through the d.c. duality (Theorem 3.1, p. 483) and use the duality to design and analyse the DCA for the trust-region subproblem.

Setting

Let X=RnX=\mathbb R^nX=Rn with its canonical inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩, and identify the dual space YYY with XXX. Functions take values in R∪{+∞}\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}. A function θ\thetaθ is in Γ0(X)\Gamma_0(X)Γ0​(X) if it is convex, lower semicontinuous, never −∞-\infty−∞, and finite at some point. Its effective domain is dom⁡θ={x:θ(x)<+∞}\operatorname{dom}\theta=\{x:\theta(x)<+\infty\}domθ={x:θ(x)<+∞}, and its conjugate is

θ∗(y)=sup⁡{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x):x∈X}.\theta^*(y)=\sup\{\langle x,y\rangle-\theta(x):x\in X\}.θ∗(y)=sup{⟨x,y⟩−θ(x):x∈X}.

For x0∈dom⁡θx_0\in\operatorname{dom}\thetax0​∈domθ, the subdifferential ∂θ(x0)\partial\theta(x_0)∂θ(x0​) is the set of yyy with θ(x)≥θ(x0)+⟨x−x0,y⟩\theta(x)\ge\theta(x_0)+\langle x-x_0,y\rangleθ(x)≥θ(x0​)+⟨x−x0​,y⟩ for all xxx. For ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 the ε\varepsilonε-subdifferential is

∂εθ(x0)={y∈Y:θ(x)≥θ(x0)+⟨x−x0,y⟩−ε  ∀x∈X}.\partial_\varepsilon\theta(x_0)=\{y\in Y:\theta(x)\ge\theta(x_0)+\langle x-x_0,y\rangle-\varepsilon\ \ \forall x\in X\}.∂ε​θ(x0​)={y∈Y:θ(x)≥θ(x0​)+⟨x−x0​,y⟩−ε  ∀x∈X}.

Given g,h∈Γ0(X)g,h\in\Gamma_0(X)g,h∈Γ0​(X), the d.c. program and its dual are

(P)α=inf⁡{g(x)−h(x):x∈X},(D)α=inf⁡{h∗(y)−g∗(y):y∈Y},\text{(P)}\quad\alpha=\inf\{g(x)-h(x):x\in X\},\qquad \text{(D)}\quad\alpha=\inf\{h^*(y)-g^*(y):y\in Y\},(P)α=inf{g(x)−h(x):x∈X},(D)α=inf{h∗(y)−g∗(y):y∈Y},

with the convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty-(+\infty)=+\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞. Throughout, the paper assumes the inclusions

dom⁡g⊂dom⁡h,dom⁡h∗⊂dom⁡g∗.(3)\operatorname{dom}g\subset\operatorname{dom}h,\qquad\operatorname{dom}h^*\subset\operatorname{dom}g^*.\tag{3}domg⊂domh,domh∗⊂domg∗.(3)

P\mathcal PP and D\mathcal DD denote the solution sets of (P) and (D).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1(i), p. 483

For every x∈dom⁡hx\in\operatorname{dom}hx∈domh,

x∈P  ⟺  ∂εh(x)⊂∂εg(x)∀ε>0.x\in\mathcal P\iff\partial_\varepsilon h(x)\subset\partial_\varepsilon g(x)\quad\forall\varepsilon>0.x∈P⟺∂ε​h(x)⊂∂ε​g(x)∀ε>0.

Milestones (the proof on pp. 483–484)

  1. d.c. duality (§3, pp. 481–482): inf⁡{g−h}=inf⁡{h∗−g∗}\inf\{g-h\}=\inf\{h^*-g^*\}inf{g−h}=inf{h∗−g∗}.
  2. (6)–(7) (p. 483): x∗∈Px^*\in\mathcal Px∗∈P iff x∗∈dom⁡gx^*\in\operatorname{dom}gx∗∈domg and g(x∗)+g∗(y)≤h(x∗)+h∗(y)g(x^*)+g^*(y)\le h(x^*)+h^*(y)g(x∗)+g∗(y)≤h(x∗)+h∗(y) for all y∈dom⁡h∗y\in\operatorname{dom}h^*y∈domh∗.
  3. (8) (p. 484): for x∗∈dom⁡hx^*\in\operatorname{dom}hx∗∈domh, the inclusions ∂εh(x∗)⊂∂εg(x∗)\partial_\varepsilon h(x^*)\subset\partial_\varepsilon g(x^*)∂ε​h(x∗)⊂∂ε​g(x∗) for all ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 are equivalent to ⟨x∗,y⟩+ε≥h(x∗)+h∗(y)⇒⟨x∗,y⟩+ε≥g(x∗)+g∗(y)\langle x^*,y\rangle+\varepsilon\ge h(x^*)+h^*(y)\Rightarrow\langle x^*,y\rangle+\varepsilon\ge g(x^*)+g^*(y)⟨x∗,y⟩+ε≥h(x∗)+h∗(y)⇒⟨x∗,y⟩+ε≥g(x∗)+g∗(y) for all ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and yyy.
  4. (7) ⇔ (8) (p. 484), for x∗∈dom⁡hx^*\in\operatorname{dom}hx∗∈domh.

Companions

  • Theorem 3.1(ii): for y∈dom⁡g∗y\in\operatorname{dom}g^*y∈domg∗, y∈D  ⟺  ∂εg∗(y)⊂∂εh∗(y)y\in\mathcal D\iff\partial_\varepsilon g^*(y)\subset\partial_\varepsilon h^*(y)y∈D⟺∂ε​g∗(y)⊂∂ε​h∗(y) for all ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0.
  • Theorem 3.1(iii): ⋃{∂h(x):x∈P}⊂D⊂dom⁡h∗\bigcup\{\partial h(x):x\in\mathcal P\}\subset\mathcal D\subset\operatorname{dom}h^*⋃{∂h(x):x∈P}⊂D⊂domh∗, with equality in the first inclusion when g∗g^*g∗ is subdifferentiable on D\mathcal DD.
  • Theorem 3.1(iv): ⋃{∂g∗(y):y∈D}⊂P⊂dom⁡g\bigcup\{\partial g^*(y):y\in\mathcal D\}\subset\mathcal P\subset\operatorname{dom}g⋃{∂g∗(y):y∈D}⊂P⊂domg, with equality when hhh is subdifferentiable on P\mathcal PP.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.1(i) characterizes global minimizers of a nonconvex function by inclusions between convex objects. It is a certificate of global optimality that uses only convex analysis. Parts (iii) and (iv) say that a solution of either program yields a solution of the other through a subgradient. This is the mechanism of the DCA, which alternates yk∈∂h(xk)y^k\in\partial h(x^k)yk∈∂h(xk), xk+1∈∂g∗(yk)x^{k+1}\in\partial g^*(y^k)xk+1∈∂g∗(yk). The paper notes that condition (i) is hard to use in an algorithm and that the DCA rests on local conditions instead. The global condition remains the reference statement that the local theory and the DCA approximate.

Formalizing it. All results here are classical and proved on paper. Parts (iii) and (iv) are proved in references the paper cites, not in the paper itself. None of them has a machine-checked proof on the platform. The mission provides a Lean layer for d.c. programming on Rn\mathbb R^nRn: the convention-respecting difference, the ε\varepsilonε-subdifferential, the standing assumptions, and the primal and dual solution sets. Missions II and III of the series reuse this layer for local optimality and for the convergence of the DCA.

Difficulty

The paper's proof is short, but each step uses a fact that needs separate work. The duality requires the biconjugation h=h∗∗h=h^{**}h=h∗∗ for h∈Γ0h\in\Gamma_0h∈Γ0​, and an exchange of two infima in the extended reals under the convention +∞−(+∞)=+∞+\infty-(+\infty)=+\infty+∞−(+∞)=+∞. The step (7) ⇔ (8) has a hidden case: a point of dom⁡h∖dom⁡g\operatorname{dom}h\setminus\operatorname{dom}gdomh∖domg. Ruling it out needs ∂εh(x∗)≠∅\partial_\varepsilon h(x^*)\neq\emptyset∂ε​h(x∗)=∅ for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, a nontrivial property of lower semicontinuous proper convex functions. The obvious approach, computing with real numbers, fails because ggg, hhh, g∗g^*g∗ and h∗h^*h∗ all take the value +∞+\infty+∞, and the extended-real arithmetic of Lean does not follow the paper's convention.

Formalization scope

  • Space. X=YX=YX=Y is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Functions are EReal-valued.
  • Published definitions. Γ0\Gamma_0Γ0​ is ThreeOpSplitting.ConvexRates.IsProperClosedConvex, ∂\partial∂ is InertialFB.IFB.IsSubgradient, and the conjugate is CondatPD.FinDim.conj, an extended-real supremum over all of XXX.
  • Convention. Mathlib has ⊤−⊤=⊥\top-\top=\bot⊤−⊤=⊥. Every difference g−hg-hg−h and h∗−g∗h^*-g^*h∗−g∗ of the paper is the explicit dcSub, which returns +∞+\infty+∞ when the first term is +∞+\infty+∞. P\mathcal PP, D\mathcal DD and α\alphaα are defined through it.
  • Domains. The ε\varepsilonε-subdifferential is empty outside the domain, as in the paper's definition. Theorem 3.1(i) is stated for x∈dom⁡hx\in\operatorname{dom}hx∈domh, the case its proof treats. For x∉dom⁡hx\notin\operatorname{dom}hx∈/domh the right-hand side holds vacuously while x∉Px\notin\mathcal Px∈/P. Every solution lies in dom⁡g⊂dom⁡h\operatorname{dom}g\subset\operatorname{dom}hdomg⊂domh, and for x∈dom⁡h∖dom⁡gx\in\operatorname{dom}h\setminus\operatorname{dom}gx∈domh∖domg both sides are false, so the restriction loses nothing. Part (ii) is restricted to y∈dom⁡g∗y\in\operatorname{dom}g^*y∈domg∗ for the same reason.
  • Standing assumptions. g,h∈Γ0g,h\in\Gamma_0g,h∈Γ0​ and the inclusions (3) are a hypothesis of every item. Finiteness of α\alphaα is not assumed: when α=−∞\alpha=-\inftyα=−∞, both solution sets are empty.
  • Not a trivialization. Defining the ε\varepsilonε-subdifferential without the domain clause, or using Mathlib's subtraction for g−hg-hg−h, would change the theorem: the first makes every yyy an ε\varepsilonε-subgradient at points where the function is +∞+\infty+∞, and the second sets g−h=−∞g-h=-\inftyg−h=−∞ wherever ggg and hhh are both +∞+\infty+∞, since Lean's ⊤−⊤=⊥\top-\top=\bot⊤−⊤=⊥. The goal does not mention (6), (7), (8) or the duality.
  • Parts (iii) and (iv) include the paper's "in particular" sufficient conditions, with the relative interior written as Mathlib's intrinsicInterior, and the "in this case" inclusions into dom⁡∂g∗∩dom⁡∂h∗\operatorname{dom}\partial g^*\cap\operatorname{dom}\partial h^*dom∂g∗∩dom∂h∗ and dom⁡∂g∩dom⁡∂h\operatorname{dom}\partial g\cap\operatorname{dom}\partial hdom∂g∩dom∂h.
  • Contributions welcome. Biconjugation and Fenchel–Young for EReal-valued functions on EuclideanSpace in the conventions of CondatPD.FinDim.conj, nonemptiness of ε\varepsilonε-subdifferentials, and the extended-real infimum exchange. These are reusable well beyond d.c. programming.

Selected references

  • Pham Dinh Tao and Le Thi Hoai An, A d.c. optimization algorithm for solving the trust-region subproblem, SIAM J. Optim. 8(2):476–505, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623494274313
  • J. F. Toland, Duality in nonconvex optimization, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 66:399–415, 1978. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(78)90243-3
  • J. F. Toland, On subdifferential calculus and duality in nonconvex optimization, Bull. Soc. Math. France, Mémoire 60:177–183, 1979. http://www.numdam.org/item/MSMF_1979__60__177_0/
  • J.-B. Hiriart-Urruty, From convex optimization to non convex optimization. Part I: Necessary and sufficient conditions for global optimality, in Nonsmooth Optimization and Related Topics, Ettore Majorana Internat. Sci. Ser. Phys. Sci. 43, Plenum Press, New York, 1988 (no persistent link; cited as [9] in the paper above).
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 4: Nonquadratic Multiplier Methods for Inequality Constraints Find an Optimal MultiplierResearch Paper

Motivation

Convex programs with inequality constraints arise when a decision must meet capacity, resource, or performance limits. Their Lagrange multipliers assign a price to each constraint. Finding an optimal multiplier gives a dual certificate and can guide a primal optimization method. Classical quadratic multiplier methods update these prices through a particular penalty. Eckstein's 1993 paper places a broader family of multiplier updates inside the theory of Bregman proximal point algorithms, allowing a nonquadratic function to shape each step (Eckstein 1993, §4.2).

The result here concerns the inequality constrained case, where multiplier vectors must be componentwise nonnegative. Eckstein identifies a monotone conjugate that incorporates this restriction into the primal penalty and proves that the resulting multiplier sequence converges to an optimal multiplier when one exists. The paper also studies primal limit points and the behavior when no optimal multiplier exists (Eckstein 1993, Theorem 7 and proof, pp. 216–219).

Setting

Let C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn be closed, nonempty, and convex. Let f,g1,…,gmf,g_1,\ldots,g_mf,g1​,…,gm​ be proper lower semicontinuous convex functions, finite on CCC. The primal problem is to minimize f(x)f(x)f(x) over x∈Cx\in Cx∈C subject to gi(x)≤0g_i(x)\le 0gi​(x)≤0 for every iii. Write g(x)=(g1(x),…,gm(x))g(x)=(g_1(x),\ldots,g_m(x))g(x)=(g1​(x),…,gm​(x)). A point solves the problem only when it lies in CCC, satisfies every inequality, and has no larger objective value than any other feasible point.

For a nonnegative multiplier ppp, the dual functional is d(p)=inf⁡x∈C{f(x)+⟨p,g(x)⟩}d(p)=\inf_{x\in C}\{f(x)+\langle p,g(x)\rangle\}d(p)=infx∈C​{f(x)+⟨p,g(x)⟩}; it equals −∞-\infty−∞ outside the nonnegative orthant. A multiplier p∗p^*p∗ is optimal when it maximizes ddd. The standing assumption that ddd is not identically −∞-\infty−∞ makes this dual functional a meaningful proper concave object (Eckstein 1993, p. 215).

A Bregman function hhh has an open zone SSS. It is continuously differentiable there, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, and satisfies the boundedness and sequential conditions of Definition 1. Its Bregman distance is Dh(u,v)=h(u)−h(v)−⟨∇h(v),u−v⟩D_h(u,v)=h(u)-h(v)-\langle\nabla h(v),u-v\rangleDh​(u,v)=h(u)−h(v)−⟨∇h(v),u−v⟩, with u∈S‾u\in\overline Su∈S and v∈Sv\in Sv∈S. The zone contains the strict positive orthant, and the image of its gradient contains that orthant. Its monotone conjugate is h∗+(z)=sup⁡p≥0{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}h^{*+}(z)=\sup_{p\ge0}\{\langle p,z\rangle-h(p)\}h∗+(z)=supp≥0​{⟨p,z⟩−h(p)}. Lemma 3 establishes that this function is finite and differentiable everywhere under these assumptions (Eckstein 1993, pp. 205, 215–216).

Given positive step sizes ckc_kck​ bounded away from zero, recursion (11) chooses xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1 as a minimizer over CCC of f(x)+ck−1h∗+(∇h(pk)+ckg(x))f(x)+c_k^{-1}h^{*+}(\nabla h(p^k)+c_kg(x))f(x)+ck−1​h∗+(∇h(pk)+ck​g(x)), then sets pk+1=∇h∗+(∇h(pk)+ckg(xk+1))p^{k+1}=\nabla h^{*+}(\nabla h(p^k)+c_kg(x^{k+1}))pk+1=∇h∗+(∇h(pk)+ck​g(xk+1)). The theorem assumes an infinite sequence conforming to these recursions; it does not assert that each minimizer exists for arbitrary data.

Formalization targets

Multiplier convergence

The goal is Eckstein's Theorem 7. If the dual problem has an optimal multiplier, then the multiplier sequence converges to one:

∃p∗∈argmax⁡dsuch thatpk⟶p∗.\exists p^*\in\operatorname*{argmax}d\quad\text{such that}\quad p^k\longrightarrow p^*.∃p∗∈argmaxdsuch thatpk⟶p∗.

When every gig_igi​ is continuous on CCC and SSS contains the closed nonnegative orthant, each subsequential limit of the primal iterates solves the constrained problem. Under the same zone condition, the multiplier sequence is unbounded if the dual has no optimal multiplier. The printed theorem says “if (10) has no solution” in this last clause; its proof on p. 218 establishes the no-optimal-multiplier condition, which is the version formalized here.

Supporting targets

The milestones include the representations of h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ in Lemma 2, the appendix results governing recession directions and the monotone conjugate, Lemma 3's global finiteness and differentiability, the subdifferential chain rule, and the Bregman proximal point result of Theorem 1. They also capture the paper's claims that recursion (11) is a Bregman proximal point run for ∂(−d)\partial(-d)∂(−d) and that primal limit points meet the feasibility, complementarity, and Lagrangian conditions.

Significance

The theorem supplies a convergence guarantee for nonquadratic methods of multipliers with inequality constraints. It separates the dual conclusion, which uses the strict positive orthant condition, from the primal limit and unboundedness conclusions, which additionally require the closed orthant to lie in the zone. This distinction lets a Bregman function whose zone excludes boundary points still yield dual convergence when optimal multipliers exist (Eckstein 1993, Theorem 7, pp. 216–218).

Eckstein proved this theorem on paper. The mission asks for machine checked proofs of its precise statements and the supporting results; the draft statements compile but their proofs remain open. A completed development would also provide reusable finite dimensional infrastructure for extended-real convex functions, monotone conjugates, Bregman distances, and convex-analytic multiplier conditions.

Difficulty

A direct appeal to ordinary proximal point convergence does not identify the update in (11) as a proximal step: the primal minimization uses h∗+h^{*+}h∗+, whereas the operator of interest is the subdifferential of the negative dual functional. The nonnegative orthant also introduces boundary behavior absent from the equality constrained case. The link requires precise conjugacy and subdifferential statements, including a globally finite monotone conjugate, before Theorem 1 can apply (Eckstein 1993, pp. 215–218). For primal limit points, the issue is to pass from optimality of each primal subproblem to feasibility, complementarity, and minimization of the limiting Lagrangian.

Formalization scope

Lean uses finite dimensional real inner product spaces for the general proximal point theorem and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m) for the primal and multiplier spaces. Functions that the paper regards as extended-valued are represented by EReal; their properness excludes −∞-\infty−∞. The infimum defining ddd and the supremum defining h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ remain extended-real operations, so an infinite value cannot silently become zero. Real values are extracted from h∗+h^{*+}h∗+ in recursion (11) only because Lemma 3 asserts finiteness everywhere.

The real function hhh is total in Lean but constrained only on S‾\overline SS; its gradient is evaluated only at points in SSS. Every multiplier iterate is explicitly in SSS. The initial primal value x0x^0x0 is unused by recursion (11). The Bregman proximal point recursion is represented by its equivalent inclusion (4), and a “limit point” is a subsequential limit. The sequential condition (vi) of Definition 1 is stated for xk∈S‾x^k\in\overline Sxk∈S, the natural first-argument domain of DhD_hDh​. The Appendix's essential strict convexity means strict convexity on convex subsets of the subdifferential domain. Its recession direction uses the stated limit inferior condition.

Lemma A4's printed unconditional claim that its composite GGG is proper lacks a finite-value witness. The formal statement keeps convexity of GGG unconditional and states properness at a point x0x_0x0​ where all inner functions and the outer function are finite; differentiability of the outer function there is expressed with local finiteness of its extended-real value. At a zero coefficient, its corresponding subgradient term contributes zero without requiring a subgradient to exist. These conditions expose rather than hide the domain issue. The formulation rules out an arbitrary multiplier sequence, an all-space supremum, or a minimization over infeasible points. Contributions proving the milestones, improving shared convex analysis libraries, and checking the boundary conventions are welcome.

Selected references

  • Jonathan Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI:10.1287/moor.18.1.202.
15 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 2: Bregman Proximal Point Sequences Exist When im ∇h Is ℝⁿ, or Is Open and 0 ∈ im TResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point method seeks a zero of an operator by repeatedly solving an implicit equation. For a maximal monotone operator, the ordinary quadratic proximal step is available throughout a Hilbert space. Eckstein's 1993 paper replaces the quadratic penalty with a Bregman function, allowing a step to reflect the geometry of a constrained problem. Before convergence can be discussed, each implicit step must have a solution in the region where the Bregman gradient is defined. Eckstein, 1993, §§1–2 isolates that existence question in Theorem 4.

The theorem draws on the L-property and a range theorem attributed to Brézis and Haraux. Their results describe when the image of a sum of monotone operators is large enough to contain the inputs of a proximal step. The paper uses those results to obtain two practical sufficient conditions: a gradient whose image is the whole space, or an open gradient image together with a zero in the image of the operator. Eckstein, 1993, Theorems 2–4

Setting

Let HHH be a finite-dimensional real inner product space, representing the paper's Rn\mathbb R^nRn. An operator T:H→2HT:H\to2^HT:H→2H assigns a set of vectors to each point. It is monotone when ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x-y,u-v\rangle\ge0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 whenever u∈Txu\in Txu∈Tx and v∈Tyv\in Tyv∈Ty, and maximal monotone when its graph cannot be enlarged while preserving monotonicity. Its domain and image are dom⁡T={x:Tx≠∅}\operatorname{dom}T=\{x:Tx\ne\varnothing\}domT={x:Tx=∅} and im⁡T={u:∃x, u∈Tx}\operatorname{im}T=\{u:\exists x,\ u\in Tx\}imT={u:∃x, u∈Tx}.

Let S⊆HS\subseteq HS⊆H be open. A Bregman function with zone SSS is a real function hhh on Sˉ\bar SSˉ satisfying the six conditions of Definition 1: continuous differentiability on SSS, strict convexity and continuity on Sˉ\bar SSˉ, boundedness of two families of partial level sets, and two sequential conditions that relate convergence to its D-function

Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,(x,y)∈Sˉ×S.D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangle,\qquad (x,y)\in\bar S\times S.Dh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,(x,y)∈Sˉ×S.

The gradient is an operator with domain SSS and image ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S). For positive step sizes ckc_kck​, a Bregman proximal point sequence is a sequence xk∈Sx^k\in Sxk∈S satisfying

1ck(∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1))∈T(xk+1)(k≥0).\frac{1}{c_k}\bigl(\nabla h(x^k)-\nabla h(x^{k+1})\bigr)\in T(x^{k+1})\quad(k\ge0).ck​1​(∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1))∈T(xk+1)(k≥0).

This is the inclusion form (4) of recursion (3). The expression ∇h+ckT\nabla h+c_kT∇h+ck​T is a sum of set-valued operators, and each step asks for a preimage of ∇h(xk)\nabla h(x^k)∇h(xk) under that sum. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 205–207

Formalization targets

The goal is Theorem 4. If TTT is maximal monotone, hhh is Bregman with zone S⊇dom⁡TS\supseteq\operatorname{dom}TS⊇domT, and either

im⁡∇h=H,orim⁡∇h is open and 0∈im⁡T,\operatorname{im}\nabla h=H, \qquad\text{or}\qquad \operatorname{im}\nabla h\text{ is open and }0\in\operatorname{im}T,im∇h=H,orim∇h is open and 0∈imT,

then every x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and every positive sequence (ck)(c_k)(ck​) admit an infinite Bregman proximal point sequence starting at x0x^0x0. The theorem asserts existence for every starting point in the zone, at every step. Eckstein, 1993, p. 209, Theorem 4

The milestones follow the cited results and the paper's proof: trimonotone operators and subdifferentials have the L-property (Theorem 2); the interior and closure of the image of a sum agree with those of the sum of images under the hypotheses of Theorem 3; the subdifferential and gradient sums agree on the domain of TTT and yield a maximal monotone sum; and the relevant gradient image lies in the image of ∇h+cT\nabla h+cT∇h+cT for every c>0c>0c>0. These targets provide the range statement needed for the infinite recursion. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 208–209

Significance

Theorem 4 certifies that the nonlinear proximal point recursion is well defined from any admissible starting point under either range condition. Without this existence statement, a convergence theorem for sequences satisfying the recursion leaves open whether a sequence can be generated. Its range conditions also distinguish Bregman geometries whose gradient covers the whole space from geometries with a smaller but open gradient image. Eckstein, 1993, p. 209

The mathematical result is proved in the paper; the work here is to formalize its definitions, the Brézis–Haraux statements cited there, and the existence theorem in Lean. The milestone statements are open proof obligations in the draft, not claims of completed machine-checked proofs. The operator vocabulary and range theorem can be reused for other implicit algorithms involving sums of monotone operators.

Difficulty

Knowing that TTT and ∇h\nabla h∇h are monotone does not by itself show that a prescribed ∇h(xk)\nabla h(x^k)∇h(xk) belongs to im⁡(∇h+ckT)\operatorname{im}(\nabla h+c_kT)im(∇h+ck​T). Even maximality of TTT alone gives no direct description of that image. The hard point is the range of the sum on the zone of hhh, especially when ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S) is a proper subset of HHH. Theorem 3 supplies an interior and closure comparison, but its domain, maximality, and L-property hypotheses must all be established for the particular operators in Theorem 4. Eckstein, 1993, pp. 208–209

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses a finite-dimensional real inner product space HHH, set-valued operators H→Set⁡HH\to\operatorname{Set}HH→SetH, and Mathlib's gradient on the open zone SSS. The image of ∇h\nabla h∇h is precisely ∇h(S)\nabla h(S)∇h(S); values of the total Lean gradient outside SSS do not enter it. The function h:H→Rh:H\to\mathbb Rh:H→R is total for Lean's type system, but only values on Sˉ\bar SSˉ matter. Its extension by +∞+\infty+∞ outside Sˉ\bar SSˉ is EReal-valued, and the subdifferential uses the published convex-analysis predicate. The L-property uses boundedness below in R\mathbb RR, matching the paper's strict lower bound above −∞-\infty−∞.

Recursion (3) is represented by its equivalent inclusion (4), with every iterate explicitly in SSS. The paper leaves the positive step sizes implicit in Theorem 4; the goal quantifies over all such sequences and imposes no convergence-specific lower bound on them. Condition (vi) of Definition 1 is applied to first arguments in Sˉ\bar SSˉ, the stated natural domain of DhD_hDh​. Trimonotonicity is the three-point cyclic condition used by Brézis and Haraux. A one-step solution, a sequence with an arbitrary starting point chosen by the prover, or an image taken over all of HHH would not establish this target.

The development needs convex subdifferentials, maximal monotonicity, maximality of appropriate sums, and the Brézis–Haraux range result. Contributions that prove these milestones or add reusable range lemmas are within scope; an optional formalization of the existence part of Theorem 5 is outside the core path.

Selected references

  • J. Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI.
  • H. Brézis and A. Haraux, Image d'une somme d'opérateurs monotones et applications, Israel Journal of Mathematics 23, 165–186, 1976. DOI.
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Convex Programming with Set-Inclusive Constraints and Applications to Inexact Linear Programming: The Set-Inclusive LP Has the Same Feasible Set as the LP of Support FunctionalsResearch Paper

Motivation

A linear program max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b, x≥0x\ge 0x≥0 assumes that the constraint matrix AAA is known exactly. In practice the columns of AAA — the activity vectors, describing how much of each resource one unit of activity jjj consumes — are estimates. A. L. Soyster's 1973 technical note in Operations Research (doi:10.1287/opre.21.5.1154) asked what a decision xxx should satisfy if every activity vector is known only to lie in a given convex set, and the decision has to be feasible for every possible realisation. He called this inexact linear programming, a term he attributes to K. O. Kortanek.

The note is the earliest formulation of what is now called robust linear optimization. Its answer — replace each uncertain column by its coordinatewise worst case — is the "Soyster model" that later work on robust optimization takes as its point of departure: Ben-Tal and Nemirovski (Math. Oper. Res. 1998; Math. Program. 2000) and Bertsimas and Sim (Oper. Res. 2004) both introduce their less conservative uncertainty sets as alternatives to it.

Setting

Fix integers m,n≥0m,n\ge0m,n≥0. Vectors in Rm\mathbb R^mRm are compared componentwise. For a set S⊆RmS\subseteq\mathbb R^mS⊆Rm and a scalar ttt, tS={ta:a∈S}tS=\{ta: a\in S\}tS={ta:a∈S}, and the sum of sets is Minkowski addition, S+T={s+t:s∈S, t∈T}S+T=\{s+t: s\in S,\ t\in T\}S+T={s+t:s∈S, t∈T}.

Let K1,…,Kn⊆RmK_1,\dots,K_n\subseteq\mathbb R^mK1​,…,Kn​⊆Rm be nonempty convex activity sets and K⊆RmK\subseteq\mathbb R^mK⊆Rm a nonempty convex resource set. Problem (I) is

sup⁡ c⋅xsubject tox1K1+x2K2+⋯+xnKn⊆K,xj≥0,\sup\ c\cdot x\quad\text{subject to}\quad x_1K_1+x_2K_2+\cdots+x_nK_n\subseteq K,\quad x_j\ge0,sup c⋅xsubject tox1​K1​+x2​K2​+⋯+xn​Kn​⊆K,xj​≥0,

and X⊆RnX\subseteq\mathbb R^nX⊆Rn denotes its set of feasible xxx. Problem (Ib) is the special case K=K(b)={y∈Rm:y≤b}K=K(b)=\{y\in\mathbb R^m: y\le b\}K=K(b)={y∈Rm:y≤b} for a right-hand side b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm.

The support functional of a set SSS is δ∗(y∣S)=sup⁡a∈Sy⋅a\delta^*(y\mid S)=\sup_{a\in S}y\cdot aδ∗(y∣S)=supa∈S​y⋅a, a value in [−∞,+∞][-\infty,+\infty][−∞,+∞]. With eie_iei​ the iii-th unit vector, the auxiliary matrix Aˉ\bar AAˉ is the m×nm\times nm×n matrix with entries

aˉij=δ∗(ei∣Kj)=sup⁡aj∈Kjaij,\bar a_{ij}=\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=\sup_{a_j\in K_j}a_{ij},aˉij​=δ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=aj​∈Kj​sup​aij​,

defined when all of these are finite, and LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) is the linear program max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to Aˉx≤b\bar Ax\le bAˉx≤b, x≥0x\ge0x≥0. Finally MMM is the set of m×nm\times nm×n matrices (a1,…,an)(a_1,\dots,a_n)(a1​,…,an​) whose jjj-th column lies in KjK_jKj​.

In the application, the activity sets are Euclidean balls Kj={a∈Rm:∥a−aj∥2≤ρj}K_j=\{a\in\mathbb R^m:\|a-a_j\|_2\le\rho_j\}Kj​={a∈Rm:∥a−aj​∥2​≤ρj​} around nominal columns aja_jaj​ of a matrix A0A_0A0​, with radii ρj≥0\rho_j\ge0ρj​≥0.

Formalization targets

Goal: the THEOREM (p. 1156)

Assume every KjK_jKj​ is nonempty and convex and δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞ for all i,ji,ji,j. Then

{x:x feasible for (Ib)}={x:Aˉx≤b, x≥0},\{x : x\ \text{feasible for (Ib)}\}=\{x : \bar Ax\le b,\ x\ge 0\},{x:x feasible for (Ib)}={x:Aˉx≤b, x≥0},

and for every objective ccc, the optimal solutions of (Ib) and of LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) coincide.

Milestones

  1. Feasibility for (I) is equivalent to x≥0x\ge0x≥0 and ∑jxjaj∈K\sum_j x_ja_j\in K∑j​xj​aj​∈K for every choice aj∈Kja_j\in K_jaj​∈Kj​ (p. 1154).
  2. LEMMA (p. 1155): XXX is convex.
  3. If δ∗(ei∣Kj)=∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=∞ for some iii, every feasible xxx of (Ib) has xj=0x_j=0xj​=0 (p. 1155).
  4. Compact activity sets have δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞ (p. 1156).
  5. xxx is feasible for (Ib) iff Ax≤bAx\le bAx≤b for every A∈MA\in MA∈M and x≥0x\ge0x≥0 (p. 1156).
  6. Every A∈MA\in MA∈M satisfies A≤AˉA\le\bar AA≤Aˉ entrywise (proof of THEOREM).
  7. Feasible for LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) implies feasible for (Ib) (proof of THEOREM).
  8. Feasible for (Ib) implies ∑jxjsup⁡aj∈Kjaij≤bi\sum_j x_j\sup_{a_j\in K_j}a_{ij}\le b_i∑j​xj​supaj​∈Kj​​aij​≤bi​ for every iii, i.e. feasible for LP(Aˉ)(\bar A)(Aˉ) (proof of THEOREM).
  9. For Euclidean balls, δ∗(ei∣Kj)=aij+ρj\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)=a_{ij}+\rho_jδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)=aij​+ρj​, so aˉj=aj+ρje\bar a_j=a_j+\rho_jeaˉj​=aj​+ρj​e with eee the all-ones vector (p. 1157).
  10. Inexact LP over balls: (Ib) has the same feasible and optimal solutions as max⁡c⋅x\max c\cdot xmaxc⋅x subject to ∑jxj(aj+ρje)≤b\sum_j x_j(a_j+\rho_je)\le b∑j​xj​(aj​+ρj​e)≤b, x≥0x\ge0x≥0 (p. 1157).

Significance

The THEOREM turns a semi-infinite constraint — one linear inequality for every matrix in MMM, of which there are typically uncountably many — into a single linear program of the original size, whose data are the support functionals of the activity sets. Any LP solver then solves the uncertain problem. The hypersphere corollary shows the cost of this guarantee concretely: every entry of column jjj is inflated by the full radius ρj\rho_jρj​, which is why the model is called conservative and why later robust-optimization work introduced ellipsoidal and budgeted uncertainty sets as less conservative alternatives. The LEMMA classifies (I) as a convex program in general, for resource sets that are not half-space intersections.

The results are proved in the paper and are standard. To our knowledge they have no machine-checked proof in Lean or Mathlib. The mission produces a formal statement of the set-inclusive constraint as an actual Minkowski-sum inclusion, the support-functional reduction with its finiteness hypotheses made explicit, and the Euclidean-ball computation — a base that robust-counterpart results for other uncertainty sets can be compared against.

Difficulty

The individual arguments are short; the work is in the bookkeeping that the paper leaves implicit. The step from "for every A∈MA\in MA∈M" to Aˉ\bar AAˉ uses that the supremum of a sum of independent terms is the sum of suprema, which needs every KjK_jKj​ nonempty and the scalars xjx_jxj​ nonnegative; with an empty activity set the Minkowski sum is empty and every x≥0x\ge0x≥0 becomes feasible. The support functional is valued in the extended reals, and its conversion to a real matrix entry is exact only under the finiteness assumption, which the paper secures by deleting columns. The ball computation needs the Euclidean norm and its dual characterisation of the maximum of a coordinate over a ball.

Formalization scope

  • Vectors are Fin m → ℝ and Fin n → ℝ, with indices 0,…,m−10,\dots,m-10,…,m−1 in place of 1,…,m1,\dots,m1,…,m; the order on vectors is componentwise.
  • Feasibility of (I) is the Minkowski-sum inclusion (∑ j, x j • K j) ⊆ R (pointwise set operations) together with x≥0x\ge0x≥0. It is not defined as "for every choice aj∈Kja_j\in K_jaj​∈Kj​", which would make milestones 1 and 5 trivial, and Aˉ\bar AAˉ is constructed from the KjK_jKj​, not an arbitrary matrix dominating MMM, which would make the goal trivial.
  • δ∗\delta^*δ∗ is valued in EReal. The entries of Aˉ\bar AAˉ are its real conversions, so every statement mentioning Aˉ\bar AAˉ assumes Kj≠∅K_j\neq\emptysetKj​=∅ and δ∗(ei∣Kj)<∞\delta^*(e_i\mid K_j)<\inftyδ∗(ei​∣Kj​)<∞, the paper's standing assumptions (pp. 1154–1156). Convexity of the KjK_jKj​ is also kept as a hypothesis wherever the paper has it, although only the LEMMA uses convexity (of KKK).
  • An optimal solution is a feasible point attaining the maximum of c⋅xc\cdot xc⋅x; the paper writes sup⁡\supsup and does not discuss attainment. Because the goal identifies the feasible sets, the two problems also have equal suprema.
  • Hyperspheres use the Euclidean norm (EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m)), not the sup norm of Fin m → ℝ, with radii ρj≥0\rho_j\ge0ρj​≥0.
  • The support functional restates the published FenchelRobust.Counterpart.supportFun with the same body.
  • Not formalized: Magnanti's extension to ≥\ge≥ and === rows (p. 1156), and the remarks on (GLP) and stochastic programming. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of an EReal statement equating the optimal values, are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. L. Soyster, Convex Programming with Set-Inclusive Constraints and Applications to Inexact Linear Programming, Operations Research 21(5), 1154–1157, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.5.1154
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear Programming and Extensions, Princeton University Press, 1963. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400884179
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust Convex Optimization, Mathematics of Operations Research 23(4), 769–805, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.23.4.769
  • A. Ben-Tal and A. Nemirovski, Robust solutions of Linear Programming problems contaminated with uncertain data, Mathematical Programming 88, 411–424, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/PL00011380
  • D. Bertsimas and M. Sim, The Price of Robustness, Operations Research 52(1), 35–53, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1030.0065
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives I: Every Weak Cluster Point of the Regularized Iterates Solves the Monotone Variational InequalityResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point algorithm is a basic iterative scheme of convex optimization and monotone operator theory. To solve a problem governed by a monotone operator, it replaces the problem by a sequence of better-conditioned problems, each regularized by a quadratic term centred at the previous iterate. Augmented Lagrangian methods, the Douglas–Rachford and ADMM splitting schemes, and many bundle methods can all be read as instances of it.

The scheme first appeared in a five-page note by Bernard Martinet in the Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle (1970), under the name régularisation par approximations successives. Martinet stated it for a monotone variational inequality on a bounded closed convex subset of a Hilbert space and proved that the weak cluster points of the iterates are solutions. This mission formalizes that first convergence theorem as it was originally stated.

Timeline.

  • 1966–1967: Hartman–Stampacchia and Lions–Stampacchia prove existence of solutions for monotone, hemicontinuous variational inequalities on bounded closed convex sets (Lions–Stampacchia 1967). Minty's lemma characterizes the solution set by the inequality with the operator evaluated at the variable point.
  • 1970: Martinet introduces the regularization iteration (2) and proves Théorème 1 below (Martinet 1970). In §IV of the same note he states the convex-minimization version.
  • 1976: Rockafellar extends the method to maximal monotone operators, allowing inexact steps and variable step sizes, and proves weak convergence of the whole sequence when a zero exists (Rockafellar 1976).
  • 1991: Güler constructs an example in which the iterates converge weakly but not strongly (Güler 1991).

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let H′H'H′ be its dual, and write (φ,y)(\varphi, y)(φ,y) for the value of a functional φ∈H′\varphi\in H'φ∈H′ at y∈Hy\in Hy∈H. Let C⊆HC\subseteq HC⊆H be convex, closed and bounded, and let T:H→H′T:H\to H'T:H→H′ be

  • monotone on CCC: (Tx−Ty, x−y)≥0(Tx-Ty,\,x-y)\ge0(Tx−Ty,x−y)≥0 for all x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C;
  • hemicontinuous on CCC: for all x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C, the map t↦T((1−t)x+ty)t\mapsto T((1-t)x+ty)t↦T((1−t)x+ty), t∈[0,1]t\in[0,1]t∈[0,1], is continuous into H′H'H′ with its weak topology.

The variational inequality (1) asks for xˉ∈C\bar x\in Cxˉ∈C such that

(Txˉ, x−xˉ)≥0∀x∈C.(T\bar x,\, x-\bar x)\ge 0\qquad\forall x\in C .(Txˉ,x−xˉ)≥0∀x∈C.

Its solution set is denoted MMM (solSet T C in Lean).

Martinet's regularization algorithm starts from x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C. Given xn∈Cx^n\in Cxn∈C, it determines xn+1∈Cx^{n+1}\in Cxn+1∈C such that

(Txn+1, x−xn+1)+⟨xn+1−xn, x−xn+1⟩≥0∀x∈C.(2)(Tx^{n+1},\, x-x^{n+1})+\langle x^{n+1}-x^n,\, x-x^{n+1}\rangle\ge 0\qquad\forall x\in C. \tag{2}(Txn+1,x−xn+1)+⟨xn+1−xn,x−xn+1⟩≥0∀x∈C.(2)

In words, xn+1x^{n+1}xn+1 solves the variational inequality for the operator T+( ⋅ −xn)T+(\,\cdot\,-x^n)T+(⋅−xn), which is strongly monotone. A point x~\tilde xx~ is a weak cluster point of (xn)(x^n)(xn) if every neighbourhood of x~\tilde xx~ in the weak topology contains xnx^nxn for infinitely many nnn.

Formalization targets

Goal: Théorème 1

x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈M.\tilde x \text{ a weak cluster point of } (x^n)\ \Longrightarrow\ \tilde x\in M .x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈M.

Every weak cluster point of the regularized iterates solves (1). The paper's Lemme 2 states the same thing. The goal assumes neither that (1) has a solution nor that TTT is bounded on CCC.

Milestones, in the order the paper uses them

  1. §2.1: (1) has at least one solution when C≠∅C\neq\emptysetC=∅, so M≠∅M\neq\emptysetM=∅.
  2. §2.2: the step (2) has exactly one solution xn+1∈Cx^{n+1}\in Cxn+1∈C for every xn∈Cx^n\in Cxn∈C.
  3. §2.3, (5): Minty's characterization M={xˉ∈C∣(Tx, x−xˉ)≥0 ∀x∈C}M=\{\bar x\in C\mid (Tx,\,x-\bar x)\ge0\ \forall x\in C\}M={xˉ∈C∣(Tx,x−xˉ)≥0 ∀x∈C}.
  4. §2.3, (7): for every xˉ∈M\bar x\in Mxˉ∈M, ∥xn+1−xˉ∥2≤∥xn−xˉ∥2−∥xn+1−xn∥2\|x^{n+1}-\bar x\|^2\le\|x^n-\bar x\|^2-\|x^{n+1}-x^n\|^2∥xn+1−xˉ∥2≤∥xn−xˉ∥2−∥xn+1−xn∥2.
  5. Lemme 1: ∥xn+1−xn∥→0\|x^{n+1}-x^n\|\to0∥xn+1−xn∥→0.
  6. §2.3, (8): lim inf⁡n(Txn+1, x−xn+1)≥0\liminf_n (Tx^{n+1},\,x-x^{n+1})\ge0liminfn​(Txn+1,x−xn+1)≥0 for every x∈Cx\in Cx∈C.
  7. §2.3, (9): lim inf⁡n(Tx, x−xn)≥0\liminf_n (Tx,\,x-x^{n})\ge0liminfn​(Tx,x−xn)≥0 for every x∈Cx\in Cx∈C.
  8. Corollaire (stronger than the goal): if M={xˉ}M=\{\bar x\}M={xˉ}, then xn⇀xˉx^n\rightharpoonup\bar xxn⇀xˉ.

Significance

The result. Théorème 1 is the first convergence theorem for the proximal point method. The method only needs to solve strongly monotone subproblems, and those are well posed even when the original problem is not. Together with the existence result, the theorem says the iterates accumulate weakly only at solutions. When the solution is unique, the whole sequence converges weakly (the Corollaire). The later theory of Rockafellar, Brézis–Lions and the splitting literature refines this statement.

Formalizing it. The result has been proved since 1970. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version that follows the original hypotheses: an operator into the dual, hemicontinuity rather than continuity, and no maximality assumption. The cited ingredients, the Lions–Stampacchia existence theorem in an infinite-dimensional Hilbert space and Minty's lemma, are not in Mathlib as far as this mission is aware. Formalizing them is part of the work and is reusable well beyond this paper. The milestone items on the platform are statements awaiting proof. None of them has a machine-checked proof yet.

Difficulty

Lemme 1 and inequality (7) follow from the defining inequality (2) and the algebra of the inner product. The difficulty is at two other points.

First, the iterates satisfy the variational inequality only approximately, and only with TTT evaluated at the iterate. A weak cluster point gives no control over TxnTx^{n}Txn, because TTT is merely hemicontinuous and is not assumed weakly continuous or bounded. The obvious idea, to pass to the limit in (Txn+1, x−xn+1)≥−εn(Tx^{n+1},\,x-x^{n+1})\ge -\varepsilon_n(Txn+1,x−xn+1)≥−εn​, fails for this reason. Passing to the limit requires the reformulation in which TTT is evaluated at a fixed point of CCC. That reformulation is Minty's characterization (5), and proving it uses hemicontinuity along segments.

Second, the proof of Lemme 1 needs a solution of (1) to exist. In infinite dimensions that is the Lions–Stampacchia theorem. Its standard proof goes through Brouwer's fixed point theorem on finite-dimensional sections together with weak compactness of CCC, and this is the heaviest item of the mission.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is a real Hilbert space: NormedAddCommGroup H, InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H. The paper says only "espace de Hilbert". Its ordered inequalities force real scalars.
  • H′H'H′ is StrongDual ℝ H, and (φ,y)(\varphi,y)(φ,y) is φ y. TTT is not replaced by a map H→HH\to HH→H through the Riesz isomorphism.
  • Hemicontinuity is weak-* continuity: for x,y∈Cx,y\in Cx,y∈C and every z∈Hz\in Hz∈H, the map t↦(T((1−t)x+ty),z)t\mapsto (T((1-t)x+ty),z)t↦(T((1−t)x+ty),z) is continuous on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. Since HHH is reflexive, this is the paper's weak topology on H′H'H′. It is not strengthened to continuity of TTT.
  • The algorithm is a relation (IsRegSeq): any sequence with x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C that satisfies (2) at every step. Existence and uniqueness of the step are milestone 2, not built into a definition.
  • A weak cluster point is MapClusterPt in WeakSpace ℝ H, a cluster point in the weak topology. It is not a cluster point in the norm topology, which would make the goal weaker.
  • lim inf⁡nan≥0\liminf_n a_n\ge0liminfn​an​≥0 in (8) and (9) is stated as ∀ε>0\forall\varepsilon>0∀ε>0, eventually an≥−εa_n\ge-\varepsilonan​≥−ε. Filter.liminf on R\mathbb RR returns a junk value on sequences that are unbounded below.
  • "C nonempty" is added to the existence milestone. The paper leaves it implicit, and the claim is false for C=∅C=\emptysetC=∅.
  • In Lean the sequence is called xxx and an arbitrary point of CCC is called yyy. The paper uses the letter xxx for both.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out. The goal does not assume M≠∅M\neq\emptysetM=∅, boundedness of TTT, or strong cluster points. Its hypotheses are satisfiable: H=RH=\mathbb RH=R, C=[−1,1]C=[-1,1]C=[−1,1], (Tx,y)=xy(Tx,y)=xy(Tx,y)=xy, xn=2−nx^n=2^{-n}xn=2−n is an instance, checked locally.

Not formalized: Remarques 1 and 2 of §II (a variable-weight variant of (2), whose printed form is apparently misprinted, and the removal of boundedness of CCC under a coercivity condition), because the paper gives neither a proof. Théorème 2 (§III) and the convex-minimization §IV are not formalized either. §IV is the subject of the companion mission.

Contributions are welcome on each milestone, and especially on the general infrastructure: Minty's lemma, Hartman–Stampacchia/Lions–Stampacchia existence for monotone hemicontinuous operators, and the fact that bounded sequences in a Hilbert space have weak cluster points. A proved Brouwer fixed point theorem (AGT.brouwer_fixed_point) and a Banach–Alaoglu theorem (FamousTheorems.banach_alaoglu) are available on the platform as tools.

Selected references

  • B. Martinet, Brève communication. Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives, Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle, série rouge, 4(R-3) (1970), 154–158. https://doi.org/10.1051/m2an/197004R301541
  • J.-L. Lions, G. Stampacchia, Variational inequalities, Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics 20 (1967), 493–519. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160200302
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14 (1976), 877–898. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • O. Güler, On the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for convex minimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 29 (1991), 403–419. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329022
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Strongly Regular Generalized Equations III: Reduced-Form Criterion — a Linear Generalized Equation over a Polyhedral Set Is Strongly Regular Iff Its Reduced Form Is Uniquely Solvable on LResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and equilibrium modelling, among them linear and nonlinear complementarity problems, variational inequalities over polyhedra, and the Karush–Kuhn–Tucker conditions of nonlinear programs, can be written as a single generalized equation

0∈f(x)+∂ψC(x),0\in f(x)+\partial\psi_C(x),0∈f(x)+∂ψC​(x),

where ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ is the normal-cone operator of a closed convex set CCC. S. M. Robinson introduced strong regularity of such an inclusion at a solution x0x_0x0​ in Strongly regular generalized equations (1980) and proved an implicit-function theorem for it: when the linearised inclusion has a locally unique, Lipschitz inverse, solutions of the perturbed problem exist, are locally unique and depend Lipschitz-continuously on the perturbation. Strong regularity has since become the standard stability notion behind sensitivity analysis and the local convergence of Newton-type methods for variational problems; see Dontchev and Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings (Springer, 2nd ed. 2014, doi:10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3).

Strong regularity depends only on the linearisation, so deciding it means deciding it for a linear generalized equation. For a general polyhedral set CCC the paper's appendix does this by a reduction: locally around x0x_0x0​ the problem is equivalent to a homogeneous problem on a cone, the reduced form, and strong regularity is equivalent to unique solvability of that reduced form. This mission formalizes that appendix and the criterion it yields.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the standard inner product, which identifies Rn\mathbb R^nRn with its dual. For C⊆RnC\subseteq\mathbb R^nC⊆Rn the normal cone at xxx is

∂ψC(x)={y:⟨y,c−x⟩≤0 for all c∈C} if x∈C,∂ψC(x)=∅ if x∉C.\partial\psi_C(x)=\{y:\langle y,c-x\rangle\le 0\ \text{for all } c\in C\}\ \text{if } x\in C,\qquad \partial\psi_C(x)=\emptyset\ \text{if } x\notin C.∂ψC​(x)={y:⟨y,c−x⟩≤0 for all c∈C} if x∈C,∂ψC​(x)=∅ if x∈/C.

A set is polyhedral convex if it is the intersection of finitely many closed half-spaces. Fix a nonempty polyhedral convex CCC, an n×nn\times nn×n real matrix AAA and a∈Rna\in\mathbb R^na∈Rn, and consider

0∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x).(A.1)0\in Ax+a+\partial\psi_C(x).\qquad\text{(A.1)}0∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x).(A.1)

It is strongly regular at a solution x0x_0x0​ with constant λ\lambdaλ if there are neighbourhoods UUU of 000 and VVV of x0x_0x0​ such that for each y∈Uy\in Uy∈U the perturbed inclusion

y∈Ax+a+∂ψC(x)(A.2)y\in Ax+a+\partial\psi_C(x)\qquad\text{(A.2)}y∈Ax+a+∂ψC​(x)(A.2)

has exactly one solution x=s(y)x=s(y)x=s(y) in VVV, and ∥s(y1)−s(y2)∥≤λ∥y1−y2∥\|s(y_1)-s(y_2)\|\le\lambda\|y_1-y_2\|∥s(y1​)−s(y2​)∥≤λ∥y1​−y2​∥ on UUU.

The reduction uses the following objects, all built from the data:

  • y0:=Ax0+ay_0:=Ax_0+ay0​:=Ax0​+a;
  • the face F:=∂ψC∗(−y0)F:=\partial\psi_C^*(-y_0)F:=∂ψC∗​(−y0​), the set of maximisers of ⟨−y0,⋅⟩\langle -y_0,\cdot\rangle⟨−y0​,⋅⟩ over CCC (it contains x0x_0x0​);
  • the tangent cone T:=TF(x0)=∂ψF(x0)∘T:=T_F(x_0)=\partial\psi_F(x_0)^\circT:=TF​(x0​)=∂ψF​(x0​)∘, the polar of the normal cone of FFF at x0x_0x0​;
  • the subspace LLL parallel to FFF (the direction of its affine hull) and the orthogonal projector PLP_LPL​;
  • the lineality space MMM of TTT, the subspace L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥, and the cone K:=T∩M⊥K:=T\cap M^\perpK:=T∩M⊥.

The reduced form of (A.1) at x0x_0x0​ is the inclusion z∈PLAw+∂ψT(w)z\in P_LAw+\partial\psi_T(w)z∈PL​Aw+∂ψT​(w) for z∈Lz\in Lz∈L; in an orthonormal basis adapted to MMM, L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥ and L⊥L^\perpL⊥ it is z∈Bw+∂ψRr×K(w)z\in Bw+\partial\psi_{\mathbb R^r\times K}(w)z∈Bw+∂ψRr×K​(w) with an (r+s)×(r+s)(r+s)\times(r+s)(r+s)×(r+s) matrix BBB. It is vacuous when L={0}L=\{0\}L={0}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem A.4 (p. 60)

If x0x_0x0​ solves (A.1), then (A.1) is strongly regular at x0x_0x0​ if and only if

L={0}or∀z∈L ∃! w∈Rn: z∈PLAw+∂ψT(w).L=\{0\}\quad\text{or}\quad\forall z\in L\ \exists!\,w\in\mathbb R^n:\ z\in P_LAw+\partial\psi_T(w).L={0}or∀z∈L ∃!w∈Rn: z∈PL​Aw+∂ψT​(w).

No Lipschitz constant is fixed: the left side is "strongly regular for some λ\lambdaλ".

Milestones

  1. Proposition A.1 (p. 58): for x0∈Cx_0\in Cx0​∈C, (C−x0)∩U=TC(x0)∩U(C-x_0)\cap U=T_C(x_0)\cap U(C−x0​)∩U=TC​(x0​)∩U for some neighbourhood UUU of 000.
  2. Proposition A.2 (p. 58): on F=∂ψC∗(−y0)F=\partial\psi_C^*(-y_0)F=∂ψC∗​(−y0​), ∂ψF(x)=∂ψC(x)+y0R+\partial\psi_F(x)=\partial\psi_C(x)+y_0\mathbb R_+∂ψF​(x)=∂ψC​(x)+y0​R+​, and ∂ψC∗(−y)⊂F\partial\psi_C^*(-y)\subset F∂ψC∗​(−y)⊂F for yyy near y0y_0y0​.
  3. Proposition A.3 (p. 58): for x0∈Fx_0\in Fx0​∈F, near the origin, 0∈(y0+k)+∂ψC(x0+h)0\in(y_0+k)+\partial\psi_C(x_0+h)0∈(y0​+k)+∂ψC​(x0​+h) iff 0∈PLk+∂ψT(h)0\in P_Lk+\partial\psi_T(h)0∈PL​k+∂ψT​(h).
  4. The correspondence (A.4) (p. 60): for xxx near x0x_0x0​ and small yyy, (A.2) holds iff 0∈PL(Ah−y)+∂ψT(h)0\in P_L(Ah-y)+\partial\psi_T(h)0∈PL​(Ah−y)+∂ψT​(h) with h=x−x0h=x-x_0h=x−x0​.

Companions

  • Corollary 3.2 (p. 53), in two items. Sufficiency: the reduced form is vacuous, or B11B_{11}B11​ is nonsingular and the Schur complement B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ is positive definite. Characterisation when K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​: strongly regular iff vacuous, or B11B_{11}B11​ nonsingular and B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ a P-matrix.
  • The 3 × 3 linear complementarity example of §4 (p. 53): strongly regular at x0=(1,0,0)x_0=(1,0,0)x0​=(1,0,0), and not strongly regular once the entry 555 of AAA becomes 444.

Significance

Theorem A.4 turns a local stability property, defined through neighbourhoods and an inverse map, into a finite-dimensional algebraic question about one homogeneous problem on a polyhedral cone. Combined with the Schur-complement criterion of Theorem 3.1, it gives checkable conditions (Corollary 3.2): nonsingularity of a block and positive definiteness, or the P-matrix property, of its Schur complement. Through the KKT reformulation of §4 this is the route by which strong second-order sufficiency and linear independence of binding constraint gradients imply strong regularity in nonlinear programming. The example of p. 53 shows the criterion deciding cases where AAA itself is neither positive definite nor a P-matrix.

The results are classical and proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. The formalization adds a coordinate-free statement of the reduced form, which the paper writes only in an adapted basis; a Lean account of exposed faces and tangent cones of polyhedra, with their local conic structure (Propositions A.1–A.2), which the paper lists "without proof" and cites to Rockafellar; and checked versions of the corollary and the example.

Difficulty

The definition of strong regularity is local, while condition (ii) is global on LLL. The obvious argument, "linearise and read off the inverse", does not apply, because ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ is a set-valued map whose graph changes shape from point to point. The step that carries the weight is Proposition A.3: a perturbation of y0y_0y0​ may move the solution off the face FFF, and only polyhedrality, through the finitely many values of ∂ψC\partial\psi_C∂ψC​ on FFF and the local conic structure of A.1–A.2, rules this out uniformly in a neighbourhood. The direction from strong regularity to (ii) needs positive homogeneity of the reduced form to pass from uniqueness near 000 to uniqueness on all of LLL. The direction from (ii) to strong regularity needs the Lipschitz property of a single-valued inverse of a polyhedral multifunction (Robinson 1979, cited as [12, Proposition 2]), which is not elementary.

Formalization scope

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with inclusions written as memberships: (A.2) is y−(Ax+a)∈∂ψC(x)y-(Ax+a)\in\partial\psi_C(x)y−(Ax+a)∈∂ψC​(x). A matrix acts through Matrix.toEuclideanLin. The normal cone carries the clause x∈Cx\in Cx∈C, so ∂ψC(x)=∅\partial\psi_C(x)=\emptyset∂ψC​(x)=∅ off CCC; without it every inclusion would be satisfiable at points outside CCC and the statements would change meaning.
  • TC(x0)T_C(x_0)TC​(x0​) is the polar of the normal cone, as on p. 58, not the closure of the cone of feasible directions. FFF is the set of maximisers of ⟨−y0,⋅⟩\langle -y_0,\cdot\rangle⟨−y0​,⋅⟩ (the sign matters: the opposite face would make the theorem false). LLL is the direction of the affine span of FFF, and PLP_LPL​ is Mathlib's Submodule.starProjection.
  • The reduced form is stated basis-free on LLL; ∂ψT\partial\psi_T∂ψT​ is the normal cone of TTT in all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. In Corollary 3.2, B11B_{11}B11​ and B/B11B/B_{11}B/B11​ are expressed through projectors onto MMM and L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥. Only the case K=R+sK=\mathbb R^s_+K=R+s​ is stated in a basis, an orthonormal basis of L∩M⊥L\cap M^\perpL∩M⊥ in which KKK is the orthant.
  • "Positive definite" does not require symmetry. "Strongly regular" without a constant is existential in λ\lambdaλ, with λ\lambdaλ real.
  • Corollary 3.2's second sentence refers on the page to "(3.8)", an evident slip for (3.9); it is formalized for (3.9).
  • The standing assumption "C nonempty polyhedral convex" is a hypothesis of every item.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: strong regularity requires existence, uniqueness in VVV and the Lipschitz bound together, and condition (ii) requires existence and uniqueness for every z∈Lz\in Lz∈L.
  • Needed infrastructure: faces and tangent cones of polyhedra and their local structure (Minkowski–Weyl, finitely many faces), orthogonal decompositions, and Lipschitz continuity of single-valued polyhedral inverses. All of this is reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the propositions, of the correspondence, and of the companions are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • S. M. Robinson, Strongly regular generalized equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 5(1), 43–62, 1980. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.5.1.43
  • S. M. Robinson, Generalized equations and their solutions, Part I: Basic theory, Mathematical Programming Study 10, 128–141, 1979. https://doi.org/10.1007/BFb0120850
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • A. L. Dontchev and R. T. Rockafellar, Implicit Functions and Solution Mappings, 2nd ed., Springer, 2014. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4939-1037-3
  • R. W. Cottle, Manifestations of the Schur complement, Linear Algebra and its Applications 8, 189–211, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(74)90066-4
6 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Nonlinear Proximal Point Algorithms Using Bregman Functions, with Applications to Convex Programming 1: The Bregman Proximal Point Algorithm Converges to a Zero of a Maximal Monotone OperatorResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point algorithm is a way to find a zero of a set-valued monotone operator by repeatedly solving a regularized version of that operator equation. Its classical regularizer is quadratic, so the distance from one iterate to the next is Euclidean. In convex optimization, that geometry can be poorly matched to the domain: the natural iterates may be constrained to a positive orthant, a simplex, or an open set with a meaningful boundary. Eckstein's 1993 paper studies what happens when a Bregman function supplies the regularization instead. The convergence question matters because the later multiplier methods in the same paper are instances of this general iteration. Eckstein (1993) develops the general result before applying it to convex programs.

The result considered here is Theorem 1 of that paper. It concerns an existing infinite run: it states what such a run does, while Theorems 4 and 5 address conditions under which a run can be generated. This separation keeps the convergence assertion precise. The result is known mathematically; the mission asks for a Lean proof of its stated generality, including its alternative when the operator has no zero.

Setting

Work in a finite-dimensional real inner-product space HHH, representing the paper's Rn\mathbb R^nRn. A monotone operator T:H→2HT:H\to 2^HT:H→2H associates a set T(x)T(x)T(x) of vectors with each point. It is monotone when ⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0\langle x-y,u-v\rangle\ge0⟨x−y,u−v⟩≥0 for every u∈T(x)u\in T(x)u∈T(x) and v∈T(y)v\in T(y)v∈T(y), and maximal monotone when its graph has no proper monotone extension. Its domain is dom⁡T={x:T(x)≠∅}\operatorname{dom}T=\{x:T(x)\ne\varnothing\}domT={x:T(x)=∅}; a zero is a point zzz with 0∈T(z)0\in T(z)0∈T(z).

Let S⊆HS\subseteq HS⊆H be open and hhh a real function on S‾\overline SS. At y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, define the Bregman distance

Dh(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,x∈S‾.D_h(x,y)=h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangle,\qquad x\in\overline S.Dh​(x,y)=h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩,x∈S.

It need not be symmetric and is generally not a metric. Definition 1 requires hhh to be continuously differentiable on SSS, strictly convex and continuous on S‾\overline SS, and to satisfy boundedness of both kinds of partial DhD_hDh​ sublevel sets. Two sequential conditions connect convergence in HHH to convergence of Bregman distances, including sequences approaching the boundary of SSS. These six requirements together define a Bregman function with zone SSS.

A Bregman proximal-point run uses positive parameters ckc_kck​ and a sequence xk∈Sx^k\in Sxk∈S satisfying

∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1)ck∈T(xk+1),k=0,1,….\frac{\nabla h(x^k)-\nabla h(x^{k+1})}{c_k}\in T(x^{k+1}),\qquad k=0,1,\ldots.ck​∇h(xk)−∇h(xk+1)​∈T(xk+1),k=0,1,….

This is the inclusion form (4) of the paper's recursion (3). It permits set-valued TTT and does not assert that a next iterate exists for arbitrary starting data. The model also uses the paper's standing domain condition dom⁡T⊆S‾\operatorname{dom}T\subseteq\overline SdomT⊆S.

Formalization targets

The main target is Theorem 1. Assume that the positive parameters have a common positive lower bound and that one of the following conditions holds: (C1) dom⁡T‾⊆S\overline{\operatorname{dom}T}\subseteq SdomT⊆S, or (C2) T=∂fT=\partial fT=∂f for a proper lower semicontinuous convex extended-valued function fff. Then

T−1(0)≠∅⟹xk⟶z for some z∈T−1(0),T−1(0)=∅ and (C1)⟹{xk:k≥0} is unbounded.\begin{aligned} T^{-1}(0)\ne\varnothing &\quad\Longrightarrow\quad x^k\longrightarrow z\text{ for some }z\in T^{-1}(0),\\ T^{-1}(0)=\varnothing\text{ and (C1)} &\quad\Longrightarrow\quad \{x^k:k\ge0\}\text{ is unbounded}. \end{aligned}T−1(0)=∅T−1(0)=∅ and (C1)​⟹xk⟶z for some z∈T−1(0),⟹{xk:k≥0} is unbounded.​

The second line retains the paper's extra (C1) requirement. The standing inclusion dom⁡T⊆S‾\operatorname{dom}T\subseteq\overline SdomT⊆S has a different direction and role. The milestone list follows Lemma 1 and the three labelled steps of Theorem 1's convergence proof: the resolvent inequality, boundedness of the run when a zero exists, identification of every limit point as a zero, and convergence of the full run. The no-zero alternative remains in the goal because restating that conjunct as a separate milestone would add no independent target.

Significance

Theorem 1 says that the nonlinear iteration cannot remain bounded without approaching a zero under (C1), and that when a zero exists the whole sequence converges under either (C1) or (C2). This is stronger than saying only that accumulation points solve the operator equation. It supplies a common convergence result for the paper's later proximal minimization and multiplier algorithms, where the operator is often a subdifferential and the geometry comes from a nonquadratic hhh. Eckstein (1993) gives those applications after the general theorem.

A formalization would add a reusable interface for Bregman functions with open zones, including their boundary behavior, and for proximal-point runs of set-valued maximal monotone operators. The published platform definitions of monotone operators and extended-valued convex analysis are reused. The new proof work is the Bregman resolvent estimate and the convergence alternative at Theorem 1's level of generality. No machine-checked proof of this specific theorem is claimed here.

Difficulty

The usual Euclidean proximal-point theorem does not apply directly after changing coordinates by y=∇h(x)y=\nabla h(x)y=∇h(x): the transformed operator need not remain monotone, as the paper observes after Theorem 1. A proof must account for the nonsymmetric DhD_hDh​, the possible boundary of SSS, and two distinct ways to identify a limit point as a zero. Under (C1), the point lies where the gradient is continuous; under (C2), the argument uses the subdifferential structure instead. The no-zero case has its own difficulty because boundedness would have to contradict maximal monotonicity without first assuming that a zero exists. The proof cites a closed-graph result for maximal monotone operators and a zero-existence fact for operators with bounded domain; those external facts are groundwork for solvers, not invented milestones.

Formalization scope

Lean uses a finite-dimensional real inner-product space rather than a coordinate-fixed Rn\mathbb R^nRn. The total function h:H→Rh:H\to\mathbb Rh:H→R is constrained only on S‾\overline SS; its gradient is evaluated only on the open zone SSS. The Bregman distance is used on S‾×S\overline S\times SS×S. Definition 1's condition (vi) explicitly places its first sequence in S‾\overline SS, the natural domain stated immediately after the definition. The run explicitly keeps every xkx^kxk in SSS and encodes recursion (3) using the equivalent inclusion (4). A positive lower bound on ckc_kck​ is expressed by one ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with ck≥εc_k\ge\varepsilonck​≥ε for every kkk.

The operator TTT is a published set-valued operator object, with its published notions of monotonicity, maximality, domain, and zeros. The proper and convex extended-valued function in (C2) uses the published epigraph and subgradient definitions, with EReal able to express +∞+\infty+∞. Subdifferentials are built from those definitions. A limit point means a limit along a strictly increasing subsequence, and unboundedness means that the full set of iterates is not bounded. The proof step on p. 207 prints T−1(0)⊆ST^{-1}(0)\subseteq ST−1(0)⊆S; the formal Step 1 uses the standing condition T−1(0)⊆S‾T^{-1}(0)\subseteq\overline ST−1(0)⊆S, which is sufficient for the Bregman distance and also covers (C2).

The run relation cannot be satisfied by an arbitrary constant sequence: its inclusion must hold at every step, and a zero-free operator under (C1) triggers the unbounded conclusion. Nor does the theorem replace convergence by existence of one convergent subsequence. Reusable contributions include properties of the Bregman resolvent and maximal-monotone graph limits. Theorem 5's separate existence and minimization claims are outside this mission's core.

Selected references

  • Jonathan Eckstein, Nonlinear proximal point algorithms using Bregman functions, with applications to convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18(1), 202–226, 1993. DOI: 10.1287/moor.18.1.202.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers VI: The Group-Lasso Block Update Is Zero iff ‖Aᵢᵀv‖₂ ≤ λ/ρ, Otherwise Ridge with ν‖xᵢ‖₂ = λ/ρTextbook

Why distributed model fitting

Fitting a statistical model usually means solving a convex problem of the form

minimizel(Ax−b)+r(x),\text{minimize}\quad l(Ax-b)+r(x),minimizel(Ax−b)+r(x),

where A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n holds one training example per row and one feature per column, b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm is the response, lll is a convex loss and rrr a convex regularizer. Least squares, the lasso, logistic regression and the support vector machine are all of this form. When either dimension is very large, or the data are stored on many machines, the problem has to be solved by processors that each see only a block of AAA.

Chapter 8 of Boyd, Parikh, Chu, Peleato and Eckstein's monograph on the alternating direction method of multipliers (ADMM) (Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 3(1), 2011) shows how ADMM does this in two ways: by splitting AAA by rows (splitting across examples, §8.2), which turns the problem into a global consensus problem, and by splitting it by columns (splitting across features, §8.3), which turns it into a sharing problem. In both cases the method is only practical because the individual updates have closed forms or reduce to small standard problems. This mission formalizes those closed forms, culminating in the update for the group lasso.

Setting

Vectors are in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​; ∥x∥1=∑j∣xj∣\|x\|_1=\sum_j|x_j|∥x∥1​=∑j​∣xj​∣. Throughout, ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 is the ADMM penalty parameter and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 a regularization weight.

Splitting across examples. Partition AAA and bbb by rows into NNN blocks Ai∈Rmi×nA_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i\times n}Ai​∈Rmi​×n, bi∈Rmib_i\in\mathbb R^{m_i}bi​∈Rmi​. With scaled dual variables uiu_iui​ and averages xˉ=1N∑ixi\bar x=\frac1N\sum_ix_ixˉ=N1​∑i​xi​, uˉ=1N∑iui\bar u=\frac1N\sum_iu_iuˉ=N1​∑i​ui​, the consensus ADMM iteration is

xik+1=argmin⁡xi(li(Aixi−bi)+ρ2∥xi−zk+uik∥22),zk+1=argmin⁡z(r(z)+Nρ2∥z−xˉk+1−uˉk∥22),x_i^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_{x_i}\Bigl(l_i(A_ix_i-b_i)+\tfrac{\rho}{2}\|x_i-z^k+u_i^k\|_2^2\Bigr),\quad z^{k+1}=\operatorname*{argmin}_{z}\Bigl(r(z)+\tfrac{N\rho}{2}\|z-\bar x^{k+1}-\bar u^k\|_2^2\Bigr),xik+1​=xi​argmin​(li​(Ai​xi​−bi​)+2ρ​∥xi​−zk+uik​∥22​),zk+1=zargmin​(r(z)+2Nρ​∥z−xˉk+1−uˉk∥22​),

followed by uik+1=uik+xik+1−zk+1u_i^{k+1}=u_i^k+x_i^{k+1}-z^{k+1}uik+1​=uik​+xik+1​−zk+1. For the lasso, l(w)=12∥w∥22l(w)=\frac12\|w\|_2^2l(w)=21​∥w∥22​ and r=λ∥⋅∥1r=\lambda\|\cdot\|_1r=λ∥⋅∥1​.

Splitting across features. Partition x=(x1,…,xN)x=(x_1,\dots,x_N)x=(x1​,…,xN​) with xi∈Rnix_i\in\mathbb R^{n_i}xi​∈Rni​ and A=[A1⋯AN]A=[A_1\cdots A_N]A=[A1​⋯AN​] with Ai∈Rm×niA_i\in\mathbb R^{m\times n_i}Ai​∈Rm×ni​, so Ax=∑iAixiAx=\sum_iA_ix_iAx=∑i​Ai​xi​. Introducing zi=Aixiz_i=A_ix_izi​=Ai​xi​ gives a sharing problem; its ADMM zzz-update minimizes l(∑izi−b)+∑iρ2∥Aixi−zi+ui∥22l(\sum_iz_i-b)+\sum_i\frac\rho2\|A_ix_i-z_i+u_i\|_2^2l(∑i​zi​−b)+∑i​2ρ​∥Ai​xi​−zi​+ui​∥22​. Writing Ax‾=1N∑iAixi\overline{Ax}=\frac1N\sum_iA_ix_iAx=N1​∑i​Ai​xi​ and zˉ\bar zzˉ for the average of the ziz_izi​, this reduces to a single problem in zˉ∈Rm\bar z\in\mathbb R^mzˉ∈Rm, all dual variables coincide, and each block update minimizes

ρ2∥Aixi−v∥22+ri(xi)\tfrac{\rho}{2}\|A_ix_i-v\|_2^2+r_i(x_i)2ρ​∥Ai​xi​−v∥22​+ri​(xi​)

for a vector v∈Rmv\in\mathbb R^mv∈Rm assembled from the previous iterate. For the group lasso, ri(xi)=λ∥xi∥2r_i(x_i)=\lambda\|x_i\|_2ri​(xi​)=λ∥xi​∥2​ (not squared).

Soft thresholding is Sκ(a)=a−κS_\kappa(a)=a-\kappaSκ​(a)=a−κ for a>κa>\kappaa>κ, 000 for ∣a∣≤κ|a|\le\kappa∣a∣≤κ, a+κa+\kappaa+κ for a<−κa<-\kappaa<−κ.

Formalization targets

Goal: the group-lasso block update (§8.3.2, pp. 69–70)

Let h(x)=ρ2∥Aix−v∥22+λ∥x∥2h(x)=\frac\rho2\|A_ix-v\|_2^2+\lambda\|x\|_2h(x)=2ρ​∥Ai​x−v∥22​+λ∥x∥2​ on Rni\mathbb R^{n_i}Rni​ and x(ν)=(AiTAi+νI)−1AiTvx(\nu)=(A_i^TA_i+\nu I)^{-1}A_i^Tvx(ν)=(AiT​Ai​+νI)−1AiT​v. Then

0∈argmin⁡h  ⟺  ∥AiTv∥2≤λ/ρ,0\in\operatorname*{argmin}h\iff\|A_i^Tv\|_2\le\lambda/\rho,0∈argminh⟺∥AiT​v∥2​≤λ/ρ,

and then 000 is the only minimizer; if ∥AiTv∥2>λ/ρ\|A_i^Tv\|_2>\lambda/\rho∥AiT​v∥2​>λ/ρ, there is exactly one ν>0\nu>0ν>0 with ν∥x(ν)∥2=λ/ρ\nu\|x(\nu)\|_2=\lambda/\rhoν∥x(ν)∥2​=λ/ρ, the point x(ν)x(\nu)x(ν) minimizes hhh, and every minimizer is of this form.

Milestones

  1. Ridge xix_ixi​-update (§8.2.1, p. 65): xik+1=(AiTAi+ρI)−1(AiTbi+ρ(zk−uik))x_i^{k+1}=(A_i^TA_i+\rho I)^{-1}(A_i^Tb_i+\rho(z^k-u_i^k))xik+1​=(AiT​Ai​+ρI)−1(AiT​bi​+ρ(zk−uik​)), the unique minimizer.
  2. Soft-thresholding zzz-update (§8.2.1, p. 65): zk+1=Sλ/(ρN)(xˉk+1+uˉk)z^{k+1}=S_{\lambda/(\rho N)}(\bar x^{k+1}+\bar u^k)zk+1=Sλ/(ρN)​(xˉk+1+uˉk) componentwise.
  3. Reduction to zˉ\bar zzˉ and equal duals (§8.3, p. 68): minimizers of the NNN-block zzz-update are exactly the vectors zi=zˉ+Aixi+ui−Ax‾−uˉz_i=\bar z+A_ix_i+u_i-\overline{Ax}-\bar uzi​=zˉ+Ai​xi​+ui​−Ax−uˉ with zˉ\bar zzˉ solving the zˉ\bar zzˉ-update, and then uik+1=Ax‾k+1+uˉk−zˉk+1u_i^{k+1}=\overline{Ax}^{k+1}+\bar u^k-\bar z^{k+1}uik+1​=Axk+1+uˉk−zˉk+1 for every iii.
  4. Feature-split lasso zˉ\bar zzˉ-update (§8.3.1, p. 69): zˉk+1=(b+ρAx‾k+1+ρuk)/(N+ρ)\bar z^{k+1}=(b+\rho\overline{Ax}^{k+1}+\rho u^k)/(N+\rho)zˉk+1=(b+ρAxk+1+ρuk)/(N+ρ).
  5. Lasso zero test, corrected (§8.3.1, p. 69): 000 minimizes ρ2∥Aix−v∥22+λ∥x∥1\frac\rho2\|A_ix-v\|_2^2+\lambda\|x\|_12ρ​∥Ai​x−v∥22​+λ∥x∥1​ iff ∥AiTv∥∞≤λ/ρ\|A_i^Tv\|_\infty\le\lambda/\rho∥AiT​v∥∞​≤λ/ρ.
  6. Eigendecomposition identity (§8.3.2, p. 70): if AiTAi=Q diag(μ)QTA_i^TA_i=Q\,\mathbf{diag}(\mu)Q^TAiT​Ai​=Qdiag(μ)QT with QQQ orthogonal, then ∥x(ν)∥2=∥diag(μ+ν1)−1QTAiTv∥2\|x(\nu)\|_2=\|\mathbf{diag}(\mu+\nu\mathbf 1)^{-1}Q^TA_i^Tv\|_2∥x(ν)∥2​=∥diag(μ+ν1)−1QTAiT​v∥2​ for ν>0\nu>0ν>0.
  7. SVM zˉ\bar zzˉ-update (§8.3.4, pp. 70–71): the minimizer of 1T(Nzˉ+1)++ρ2∥zˉ−Ax‾−u∥22\mathbf 1^T(N\bar z+\mathbf 1)_++\frac\rho2\|\bar z-\overline{Ax}-u\|_2^21T(Nzˉ+1)+​+2ρ​∥zˉ−Ax−u∥22​ is a shifted soft thresholding of v=Ax‾+uv=\overline{Ax}+uv=Ax+u.

Significance

The goal result says that a group-lasso block either switches off entirely, which is how group sparsity arises, or solves a ridge regression whose ridge parameter is the unique root of a scalar monotone equation; this is what makes the distributed group lasso implementable with one cached factorization per block and a bisection. The milestones are the remaining closed forms that turn the two distributed schemes of Chapter 8 into concrete algorithms, and the reduction of milestone 3 is the structural fact that lets feature splitting carry a single dual variable.

The book derives these facts in running text and states them without proof. None of them is formalized on Prove2Me, and the book's printed zero test for the lasso (p. 69) uses the wrong norm; a machine-checked collection of the correct updates removes that kind of error from the record and gives later ADMM missions a verified library of update formulas.

Difficulty

Each statement is a characterization of all minimizers of a nonsmooth convex function, not a check that a formula satisfies a stationarity equation. For the goal, the nonsmooth term λ∥x∥2\lambda\|x\|_2λ∥x∥2​ has a kink at 000, hhh need not be strictly convex when AiA_iAi​ has a nontrivial kernel, and the existence and uniqueness of the parameter ν\nuν is part of the claim rather than an assumption: the obvious move of assuming a suitable ν\nuν and checking the formula proves nothing about the case split or about uniqueness, and the singular case of AiTAiA_i^TA_iAiT​Ai​ is exactly where naive arguments break. Milestone 3 must handle an arbitrary convex loss lll, with no closed form at all.

Formalization scope

Vectors are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); matrices are Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ acting through Matrix.toEuclideanLin; blocks are indexed by Fin N (0-based); the regularization weight λ\lambdaλ is lam; the eigenvalue vector the book also calls λ\lambdaλ (p. 70) is μ. "xxx minimizes FFF" is Mathlib's IsMinOn F Set.univ x. Iteration superscripts are dropped: each statement is about one update with the previous iterate given. Explicit choices:

  • ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 and N≥1N\ge1N≥1 are hypotheses wherever the book uses them.
  • Closed forms are stated as "minimizer   ⟺  \iff⟺ formula", which contains existence and uniqueness; the book's "the solution" in §8.3.2 is stated as existence and uniqueness of ν\nuν plus a characterization of every minimizer, with no invertibility hypothesis on AiTAiA_i^TA_iAiT​Ai​.
  • (AiTAi+νI)−1(A_i^TA_i+\nu I)^{-1}(AiT​Ai​+νI)−1 is Mathlib's matrix inverse, used only for ν>0\nu>0ν>0, where it is the true inverse.
  • The loss in milestone 3 is real valued and convex, as in (8.1).
  • The lasso zero test is stated with ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​; the book prints ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​, which is false for the ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​ term.
  • The SVM zˉ\bar zzˉ-update uses the coefficient ρ/2\rho/2ρ/2 printed on p. 70, which matches the printed thresholds N/ρN/\rhoN/ρ.
  • The book's "assuming AiA_iAi​ is tall" (p. 70) is not imposed; the identity holds without it.

A statement that only checks that x(ν)x(\nu)x(ν) satisfies the optimality equation, or that assumes the parameter ν\nuν exists, does not capture the goal; the goal asserts existence and uniqueness of ν\nuν and describes every minimizer of hhh.

Contributions welcome: subgradient calculus for ∥⋅∥2\|\cdot\|_2∥⋅∥2​ and ∥⋅∥1\|\cdot\|_1∥⋅∥1​ in EuclideanSpace, first-order optimality for convex quadratics plus a convex nonsmooth term, and the monotonicity of ν↦ν∥(M+νI)−1c∥2\nu\mapsto\nu\|(M+\nu I)^{-1}c\|_2ν↦ν∥(M+νI)−1c∥2​ for positive semidefinite MMM; these are reusable for every proximal and ADMM update.

Selected references

  • S. Boyd, N. Parikh, E. Chu, B. Peleato, J. Eckstein, Distributed Optimization and Statistical Learning via the Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 3(1):1–122, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1561/2200000016
  • M. Yuan, Y. Lin, Model selection and estimation in regression with grouped variables, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 68(1):49–67, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9868.2005.00532.x
  • R. Tibshirani, Regression shrinkage and selection via the lasso, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society B 58(1):267–288, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1996.tb02080.x
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 10 of 14Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me